Table of Contents
1
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2009 Ford Motor Company
3
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Motor Company product.
Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading
this handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle,
the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This vehicle’s Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant
available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this vehicle’s Owner’s Guide when reselling the
vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
4
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
5
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC supplement for more information.
6
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are
capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near
crash event. The recorded information may assist in the
investigation of such an event. The modules may record
information about both the vehicle and the occupants, potentially
including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling;
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel; and
• longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location, using GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly
connected to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada. To the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC or its
features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped)
is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and
connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag
or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of
electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle
location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not
activate the feature. See your SYNC supplement for more
information. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions
and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
7
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC supplement
for more information.
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in-vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
8
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.
9
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Airbag - Front
Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Side
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Parking Aid System
Speed Control
Stability Control System
Master Lighting Switch
Fog Lamps-Front
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fuse Compartment
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Defrost/Demist
10
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Window Lockout
Interior Luggage
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Compartment Release
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Fan Warning
Explosive Gas
MAX
MIN
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
Power Steering Fluid
Service Engine Soon
Engine Air Filter
Jack
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Low Tire Pressure
Warning
Check Fuel Cap
11
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause extensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulbs work. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Note: Some warning lights are
reconfigurable telltale (RTT)
indicator lights and will illuminate in
the message center. These lights
function the same as the other
warning lights.
Charging system (RTT):
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Engine oil pressure (RTT):
Illuminates when the oil pressure
falls below the normal range, refer
to Engine oil in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
12
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Engine coolant temperature
(RTT): Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Low fuel (RTT): Illuminates when
the fuel level in the fuel tank is at
or near empty. Refer to Fuel gauge
in this chapter.
Low washer fluid (RTT):
Illuminates when the washer level in
the washer fluid reservoir is low.
Door ajar (RTT): Illuminates when
the ignition is in the run position
and any door is open.
Throttle Control/Transmission
(RTT): Illuminates when a
powertrain or an AWD fault has
been detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned on to check the bulb and to
indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing. Normally, the ЉService engine soonЉ light will stay on until the
engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the ЉService engine soonЉ light blinks eight
times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See the
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
13
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned on when the
!
P
BRAKE
engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or by
applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned on. If the brake
system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service
immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination after releasing the
parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system
malfunction and the brake system should be inspected immediately by
your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
ABS
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
14
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned on, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will sound if
there is a malfunction in the indicator light.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder chime feature.
AdvanceTrac/Traction control:
Illuminates when the
AdvanceTrac/Traction control is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
AdvanceTrac/Traction
Control™ off light: Illuminates
when the AdvanceTrac/Traction
Control™ has been disabled by the
driver. Refer to the Driving chapter
for more information.
OFF
Overdrive cancel and grade
assist (RTT) (if equipped):
Illuminates when the overdrive
function of the transmission has
been turned off and the grade assist
function has been turned on, refer to the Driving chapter.
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on or
begins to flash, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For
more information on this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
15
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
(if equipped): Illuminates when
ACC is engaged while following a
vehicle. Refer to Adaptive cruise
control in the Driver Controls
chapter for more information.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is engaged or
when the ACC is engaged without
following a vehicle. Turns off when
the speed control system is
disengaged or when the ACC in
activated.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecuriLock Passive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Heads up display (if equipped):
A red bar will illuminate on the
windshield in certain instances when
using adaptive cruise control and/or
the collision warning system. It will
also illuminate momentarily when
you start your vehicle to make sure the display works. See the Driving
chapter for more information.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake on chime: Sounds when the parking brake is left on and
the vehicle is driven. If the warning stays on after the park brake is off,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
16
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Message center activation chime: Sounds when some warning
messages appear in the message center display for the first time.
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If the needle moves close to
the “H” range, the engine is
overheating. For more information,
refer to Engine fluid temperature management and What you should
know about fail-safe cooling in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
17
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is on). The fuel gauge may vary
slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade.
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates
which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle. Refer to
Message center in this chapter on
how to switch the display from
Metric to English.
Trip odometer: Refer to Message center in the Instrument cluster
chapter.
MESSAGE CENTER
Your vehicle’s message center allows you to configure/personalize certain
vehicle options to suit your needs.
The message center is also capable of monitoring many vehicle systems
and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions
with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime.
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster.
18
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Info
Press the INFO button repeatedly to
cycle through the following features:
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release INFO
until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents the trip
mode). Press and hold RESET until it resets.
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to
English.
MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed)
For more information, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles
(80 km), to empty. Press RESET to clear this warning message. It will
return at approximately 25 miles (40 km), 10 miles (16 km) and 0 miles
(0 km) miles to empty.
Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy,
which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km).
This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The
running average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if
the battery is disconnected.
AVG MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
19
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
To determine your average highway fuel economy, do the following:
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press RESET (press and hold RESET for two seconds
in order to reset the function) after setting the speed control to get
accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
MPG (L/km)
This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
poor economy to ↑ excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
TIMER
Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time.
To operate, do the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET until the timer resets.
Blank Screen
The message center display will be blank after cycling through all of the
Info menu items.
System check and vehicle feature customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly
to cycle the message center through
the following features:
RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
When this message appears, press the RESET button and the message
center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a
status of the item if needed.
20
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
1. PASSIVE ENTRY PASSIVE START (PEPS)
2. OIL LIFE
3. WASHER FLUID LEVEL
4. DOOR AJAR STATUS
5. LIFTGATE STATUS
6. BRAKE SYSTEM
7. TIRE PRESSURE
8. BLIND SPOT SYSTEM (if equipped)
9. CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM (if equipped)
10. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) (if equipped)
11. PARK AID
12. FUEL LEVEL
13. MYKEY DISTANCE (if MyKey™ is programmed)
14. MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
15. ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change
(approximately 7,500 miles [12,000 km] or 12 months) perform the
following:
1. Press and release SETUP to display “OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET =
NEW”.
2. Press and hold RESET for two seconds and release to reset the oil life
to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% miles value from 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 12 months to another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press
RESET to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release and press will
reduce the value by 10%.
Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil
life start value to 4,500 miles (7,200 km) and 219 days.
21
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
UNITS
Displays the current units in English or Metric.
Press RESET to change between English and Metric.
AUTO HIGH BEAM (if equipped)
This feature automatically turns on your high beams if it is dark enough
and no other traffic is present.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
AUTOLAMP
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
Press RESET to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30,
60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
AUTOUNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
COLLISION WARN GAP (if equipped)
This allows you to adjust the sensitivity setting of the collision warning
system. See Collision warning system in the Driving chapter for more
information.
Press RESET to change the sensitivity setting from high sensitivity
<– – – – –> to low sensitivity <–>.
COLLISION WARN CHIME (if equipped)
This feature warns the driver of a possible collision. See Collision
warning system in the Driving chapter for more information.
Press RESET to turn the warning chime on or off. The system will revert
to chime on each time the vehicle is started. The heads up display and/or
chime will activate briefly to confirm the last setting.
COLLISION WARN SYSTEM (if equipped)
This feature warns the driver of a possible collision. See Collision
warning system in the Driving chapter for more information.
22
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
Press RESET to turn the collision warning system on or off. The system
will revert to on each time the vehicle is started. The heads up display
and/or chime will activate briefly to confirm the last setting.
BLIND SPOT (if equipped)
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is designed to assist the
driver by monitoring the side areas of the vehicle.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
CROSS TRAFFIC (if equipped)
The Cross Traffic Alert system is designed to assist and warn the driver
when backing out of parking spaces.
Press RESET to turn it on or off.
POWER LIFTGATE (if equipped)
This feature allows users to open/close the rear liftgate at the touch of a
button.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
EASY ENTRY
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat backwards for easy
exit/entry from the vehicle.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
REAR PARK AID
This feature sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear
bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (if equipped)
This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP/ CLEAR MYKEY
For more information refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message
center through each of the language choices.
Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice.
23
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
• Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
• Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
• Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET.
This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing
the message.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver’s door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger side door
is not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
LIFTGATE AJAR — Displayed when the liftgate is not completely
closed. Press RESET to reset display.
CHECK PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the transmission
is in R (Reverse) and the reverse sensing system (park aid) is disabled.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may
not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
24
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the washer fluid reservoir
is less than one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to
Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle has low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT — The power steering system
has disabled power steering assist due to a system error; service is
required.
SERVICE POWER STEERING — The power steering system has
detected a condition that requires service.
SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW — The power steering system
has detected a condition that requires service immediately.
REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT — Displayed when objects
are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the
seat, if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AWD OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the AWD system has been
automatically disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is
overheating. The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or
after the system is allowed to cool.
25
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
CHECK AWD (if equipped) — Displayed in conjunction with the
Throttle Control/Transmission/AWD
light when the AWD system is
not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON — Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 10% or less.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when the oil life left reaches
0%.
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — Displayed when
the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. For more information,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
INTKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is
made to program a fifth integrated key to the remote key entry system.
For more information on integrated key, refer to the Locks and Security
chapter in this manual.
CRUISE ON RADAR READY (if equipped) — Displayed when the
driver pressed the cruise On/Off control and ACC was off.
CRUISE OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the driver pressed the
Cruise On/Off control and ACC was on.
SET XXX MPH GAP ACC GAP (if equipped) — Displayed when
ACC is active and driver has selected a GAP setting using the steering
wheel control <---> button.
CRUISE OVERRIDE (if equipped) — Displayed when the accelerator
pedal is being pressed while ACC is active.
CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed when a system
malfunction is preventing ACC from engaging.
CRUISE MALFUNCTION (if equipped) — Displayed when a radar
malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging.
CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL (if
equipped) — Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor
radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar.
Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
COLLISION WARN MALFUNCTION (if equipped) — Displayed
when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system.
The system will be disabled.
COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed
when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system.
The system will be disabled.
26
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE
MANUAL (if equipped) — Displayed when the collision warning
system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad
weather or ice/mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean
the sensor to resolve.
PRESS BRAKE TO START (if equipped) — Displayed when the
start/stop button is pressed without the brake pedal being applied. This
is a reminder that the brake pedal must be applied when the start/stop
button is pressed in order to start the engine.
SHIFT TO PARK (if equipped) — Displayed when the start/stop
button is pressed to shut off the engine with the shift select lever in any
position other than P (Park). Refer to Fast restart feature in Push
button start system in the Driving chapter for more information.
NO KEY DETECTED (if equipped) — Displayed if the Intelligent
Access Key is not detected by the system in the following three
scenarios:
• When the start/stop button is pressed in an attempt to either start the
engine or cycle through the ignition states.
• When the engine is running and a door is opened then closed.
• When the vehicle’s speed exceeds 10 mph (16 km/h) for the first time
after starting. Refer to Push button start system in the Driving chapter
for more information.
RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED (if equipped) — Displayed
when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and a
Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle. Refer to Push
button start system in the Driving chapter for more information.
ACCESSORY POWER ACTIVE (if equipped) — Displayed when the
vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.
STARTING SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when there
is a problem with your vehicle’s starting security system; your vehicle
will not be able to start. See your authorized dealer for service.
KEY PROGRAMMED 3 KEYS TOTAL (if equipped) — Displayed
during spare key programming, when a third Intelligent Access Key is
programmed to the system.
KEY PROGRAMMED 4 KEYS TOTAL (if equipped) — Displayed
during spare key programming, when a fourth Intelligent Access Key is
programmed to the system.
27
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
MAX # OF KEYS LEARNED (if equipped) — Displayed during spare
key programming, after a fourth Intelligent Access Key is programmed or
upon entering spare key programming mode with four Intelligent Access
Keys already programmed to the vehicle.
MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed at startup when
MyKey™ is in use. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter
for more information.
KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is made
to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to MyKey™ in
the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle
speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
and MyKey™ is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to
MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching
80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
TOP SPEED MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph
(130 km/h). Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use and Belt-Minder is activated. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey™ is in
use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac system and the optional
setting is on. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when a
fault with the blind spot information system has occurred. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
28
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a fault with the cross traffic alert system has occurred. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed when
blind spot information system is not available. See Blind Spot
Information System (BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving
chapter.
CROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — Displayed
when cross traffic alert is not available. See Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter.
SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL (if equipped) — Displayed when
the blind spot information system/cross traffic alert system sensors are
blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) with Cross
Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter.
VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT (if equipped) — Displayed when
the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert (CTA) system is
operating and senses a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter.
VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT (if equipped) — Displayed when
the blind spot information system with cross traffic alert (CTA) system is
operating and senses a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert in the Driving chapter.
ACTIVE PARK FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when a fault has
occurred with the active park assist system. Refer to Active park assist
in the Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK CANCELLED (if equipped) — Displayed when the
active park assist feature has been canceled when it is in use. Refer to
Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information.
CANCELLED BY OVER SPEED (if equipped)— Displayed when the
active park assist feature self cancels due to vehicle speed over the
preset limit allowed by the active park assist system. Refer to Active
park assist in the Driving chapter for more information.
CANCELLED BY DRIVER INPUT (if equipped) — Displayed when
the autopark feature has been canceled due to driver inputs. Refer to
Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information.
CANCELLED BY ADV TRAC EVENT (if equipped) — Displayed
when the active park feature has been canceled due to the
AdvanceTrac system activating. Refer to Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
29
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
CANCELLED BY ABS EVENT (if equipped) — Displayed when the
active park feature has been canceled due to the ABS activating. Refer to
Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
SPACE FOUND PULL FORWARD (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
SPACE FOUND STOP (if equipped) — May display when using the
active park assist system. See Active park assist in the Driving chapter
for more information.
PULL FORWARD USE CAUTION (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
BACK UP SLOWLY USE CAUTION (if equipped) — May display
when using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
BACK UP USE CAUTION (if equipped) — May display when using
the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the Driving
chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK FINISHED (if equipped) — May display when using
the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the Driving
chapter for more information.
REMOVE HANDS PUT IN REVERSE (if equipped) — May display
when using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK NOT AVAILABLE (if equipped) — May display when
using the active park assist system. See Active park assist in the
Driving chapter for more information.
ACTIVE PARK DEACTIVATED (if equipped) — Displayed when the
active park feature has been turned off. Refer to Active park assist in
the Driving chapter for more information.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac
system has detected a condition that requires service.
30
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Cluster
TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE — Displayed when the perimeter
alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the
driver’s side door. In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from
triggering, the ignition must be turned to start or on before the
12 second chime expires. See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and
Security chapter.
POWER REDUCED TO LOWER TEMP — Displayed when vehicle
performance is reduced due to high engine fluid temperatures. See
Engine fluid temperature management and What you should know
about fail-safe cooling in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
SERVICE TIRE MOBILITY KIT (if equipped) — Displayed when the
tire mobility kit requires service. See your authorized dealer for more
information.
31
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
Note: If your volume is muted and MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED is
displayed, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
Mobile media system
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a mobile media system which allows
you to listen to, record and save music, play DVDs (audio and video) and
also access some climate control functions. Press the hard buttons on
the system face (such as RADIO or MEDIA) to access corresponding
menus on the touchscreen. Tabs will appear along the left side of the
touchscreen which represent major components within that menu.
Simply touch the desired tab to access.
1. I (Information): Press to access
the information menu. Press while
32
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
the information menu is active to step through the information tabs of:
the Calendar, System Info (System Information) and Help.
2. PHONE: Press PHONE to access
SYNC phone features. Refer to
your SYNC supplement for more
information.
3. CLIMATE: Press CLIMATE to
access the climate menu. Press the
button while the climate menu is
active to step through the climate menu tabs of Front Zone and Rear
Zone.
4.
(Eject): Press
(Eject) to
eject the disc in the slot.
5. TUNE: In radio or satellite
radio mode (if activated), turn to
advance in individual increments
up/down the frequency/channel
listing.
In MP3 mode, turn to advance to the next/previous folder.
/
: Press to play or pause a CD, Jukebox, User Device or DVD
when playing in the mobile media system.
6. DISP: Press the DISP button
repeatedly to step through the
following display modes: On, Status
Bar Only, and Off.
7. CLOCK: Press to access the
clock screen and set the time.
8. SEEK:In radio and satellite
radio mode (if activated),
press
/
to seek to the
previous/next available station or channel within the currently selected
Category/Genre.
In CD/DVD, Jukebox or User device mode, press
/
to access
the previous/next track or chapter.
33
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
9. SHUFFLE: Press to shuffle the
songs on the current CD, Jukebox
or User Device.
10. SCAN: Press for a brief
sampling of radio stations, satellite
radio channels, CD, Jukebox or User
Device tracks.
11. VOL (On/off/volume): Press to turn the system on/off. Turn to
adjust the volume.
12. Memory presets: In radio and
satellite radio mode (if
activated): Press 1-6 to access
your previously saved preset
stations/channels.
To save to a preset: Tune to the desired station/channel. Press and
hold the desired preset button in which you would like to store the
station/channel. The sound will momentarily mute and then return when
the preset is saved.
13. MENU: Press MENU to access
the system menu. Press while the
system menu is active to step
through the system menu tabs of
Display, Feedback Settings, System Settings and Valet Mode.
14. RADIO: Press RADIO to access
the radio menu. Press while the
radio menu is active to step through
the available radio sources of AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1, SAT2, and SAT3
(satellite radio, if activated).
15. MEDIA: Press MEDIA to access
the media menu. Press while the
media menu is active to step
through the available media sources of CD/DVD, Jukebox, User Device,
Rear DVD (if equipped) and Rear AUX (if equipped).
16. SOUND: Press SOUND to access the sound menu. Press while the
sound menu is active to step through the sound menu tabs of
Bass/Treble, Balance/Fade, SCV (Speed compensated volume), DSP
(Digital Signal Processing), Visualizer and THX Demo (if equipped).
17. CD/DVD slot: Insert a CD or DVD, label side up.
34
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
After the system initializes, the screen will be divided in two sections:
• Status bars: This is the top and bottom portion of screen that
displays the clock or date and useful information, depending on the
current mode.
• Display area: The interactive screen that is activated by finger touch
and changes depending on current system operation. Graphical
buttons are displayed in this area depending on the current screen for
you to make choices.
Driving restrictions
In order to prevent the system from distracting you while driving, access
to certain functions are restricted when the vehicle is traveling above
5 mph (8 km/h). Restricted functions include:
• Scrolling of long lists
• Jukebox restrictions such as creating/editing playlists, sorting playlists,
editing track, artist and album names
• Uploading photographs
• Similar SYNC features
Home screen
Your system has a home screen where you can save/view favorite
pictures, view your current audio and climate control settings as well as
display the audio visualizer. You can split the screen in to two or three
different sections, or you can choose to have one main view.
To access your home screen, press the house icon (
left hand corner of any screen.
) at the bottom
The left side of the screen will
display an uploaded photo. The
right side can also display the
uploaded photo. The upper right
panel will only display the current
audio settings. The lower right panel
displays the vehicle’s climate
settings (if equipped), the visualizer
or the hybrid fuel economy (if
equipped). Press
on the bottom
of the display to access the settings
screen for the right side.
35
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Loading pictures
Your system allows you to save and view up to 32 photos. To access:
1. Ensure that you are on the Home
Screen. (Press
at the bottom
left of any screen to access.)
2. Touch the left side of the home
screen to initiate the left screen
photo display and saved photos
screen.
3. Select the ‘Add’ button on the
touchscreen. The following
disclaimer will appear, “Please
confirm the supported photo
formats”.
4. When the pop-up dialog box with
the disclaimer appears, press OK
and ensure that you are using the
proper format.
5. Insert a CD-ROM which contains
your photos as jpegs.
6. Press OK. The photos will be
listed on the right half of the screen.
7. Select either ADD or ADD ALL.
The photos are now saved to the hard drive.
Photo display limitations:
• The file must be 1.5MB or less.
• The extension of the file must be one of JPE/JPG/JPEG.
• The CD or DVD must be ISO 9660 format, UDF format is not
supported.
• The file path must be 255 characters or less.
36
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• Up to 256 files or folders can be displayed in one folder.
• Not compatible with discs written in Packet Write mode.
• Only the photograph(s) which meet these conditions will be displayed.
Note: When burning a CD, ensure that you ‘close’ or ‘finalize’ the disc
when the CD-burning process finishes (you should select this option
before you start burning). Consult your software manual or the program’s
Help files if you’re not sure how to finalize the disc. Also, write the audio
data into the first session of a multi-session CD as audio systems won’t
be able to sort through other sessions to find more audio tracks.
Rearview camera display (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rearview camera on the tailgate
which provides a video image of the area behind the vehicle. When the
transmission is in (R) Reverse, an image will automatically display on the
touchscreen. Once the vehicle is back in (D) Drive, the image will
continue to display until you are driving over 5 mph (8 km/h). To remove
this image from the screen, press any hard button on the mobile media
system.
When the vehicle is in Park (P), you
may press SETTINGS to make
adjustments to the brightness of the
display as well as the rearview
camera display.
When the rear camera delay
function is ON, it extends the
display of the camera image into
Drive mode until vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). This
is useful when trying to
engage/disengage a trailer.
Prior to using, ensure that the camera lens is clear of any debris, mud,
etc. and that both reverse lamps are operational if using at night. For
further information, please refer to Rearview camera system in the
Driving chapter.
37
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
System menu features
Your system has many menu features such as allowing you to adjust the
touchscreen brightness, adjusting the time and languages, adjusting the
feedback and system settings. To access, press the MENU hard button.
Display options
1. Press the MENU hard button.
2. Select the ‘Display’ tab on the
touchscreen. Select from the
following display options:
Brightness: Select AUTO DIM to
manually adjust the brightness by
pressing + or —.
Contrast: Press + to increase and
— to decrease the level of contrast
on the screen.
Day/Night Mode: Select ‘Day’ to always display day mode or ‘Night’ to
always display night mode. Select ‘Auto’ for the screen to automatically
change between day and night mode.
Color Palette: Select between four different background colors: 1.
Black, 2. Blue, 3. Green, 4. Red.
Note: When the headlamps are on under high ambient light conditions,
the system will remain in day mode, even if night is selected.
Feedback settings
1. Press the MENU hard button.
2. Select the ‘Feedback Settings’ tab
on the touchscreen. Select from the
following display options:
• Touch screen button beep: Select to have the system sound a tone
when a selection is made on the touch screen.
• Voice volume: Press to increase (+) or decrease (-) the system’s
voice volume.
38
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
System settings
1. Press the MENU hard button.
2. Select the ‘System Settings’ tab
on the touchscreen. Select from the
following display options:
Language: Select between ‘English’, ‘Francais’ or ‘Espanol’.
Units: Select between ‘English’ and ‘Metric’.
Keyboard layout: Select ‘ABC’ or ‘QWERTY’ for the keyboard layout in
the display.
Delete saved photos: Select ‘View’ to see what stored photos you may
want to delete.
Restore factory default settings: Press ‘Reset’ to return to the factory
default settings.
Valet mode
1. Press the MENU hard button.
2. Select the ‘Valet Mode’ tab on the
touchscreen. Press ‘Enable Valet
Mode’.
39
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
3. Enter a four digit Personal
Identification Number (PIN) and
press ‘Enter’. The system will ask
you to re-enter the PIN. Once
entered, select ‘Enable’ to activate
Valet mode. The system is then
locked until the correct four digit
PIN is entered.
Note: The PIN can be reset by simultaneously pressing and holding
presets 1 and 5 while on the PIN entry screen. After approximately five
seconds, the system will transition to the Valet mode screen indicating
that the PIN is reset. Once you have reset the PIN, the system will then
allow you to set a new PIN.
Setting the clock
1. Press the CLOCK hard button.
2. Select from the following display
options:
Time set buttons: To set the time, press +, — to increase/decrease the
time and select AM or PM.
Display clock: Press to turn the clock display on/off.
Format: Press to select between 12 hour and 24 hour format.
Time Zone: Press to select your time zone.
Note: The system does not implement daylight savings time.
Restore defaults: Select ‘Reset’ to reset to the default settings.
40
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
THX audio system — if equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with
the THX certified premium audio
system. This system creates optimal
acoustic quality for all seating
positions and road conditions.
The system offers an advanced speaker system, amplifier, subwoofer and
equalizer.
AM/FM
1. Ensure that the system is on.
2. Press the RADIO hard button.
3. Select the ‘AM’ tab on the
touchscreen to access AM mode.
4. Press the ‘FM’ tab repeatedly to
switch between FM1 or FM2 mode.
5. On these screens you may select between ‘Show Options’ and ‘Show
Presets’. Press ‘Show Options’ to access:
• Scan: Press for a brief sampling of all listenable stations. Press again
to disable and remain on the current selection.
• Scan Presets: Press for a brief sampling of all the stations held in the
memory presets.
41
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• Autoset Presets: The autoset feature allows you to set strong radio
stations without losing your original preset stations. This feature is
helpful on trips when traveling between cities with different radio
stations.
To enable, select AUTOSET PRESETS and the six strongest stations
in your current area will be set as presets. To return to your original
presets, press AUTOSET PRESETS again and the feature will disable.
• Rear Zone: Press to access the functionality of the Family
Entertainment System (if equipped).
• RDS: In FM mode, this feature allows you to receive text information
from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. In FM mode, press RDS to
activate/deactivate. RDS must be activated in order to access PTY and
SET PTY.
Note: When RDS is active, the visualizer is not displayed.
• Set PTY: In FM mode, press to select a program type, which, once
selected, will be displayed above the SET PTY button. Once PTY has
been programmed, press SEEK or SCAN to initiate a search up or
down the frequency. The search will stop when the desired program
type has been reached.
Note: The system will scan the frequency band three times for the
chosen program type. If the program type is unavailable in your
reception range, the system will return to the previous station.
6. Press SHOW PRESETS to view the preset stations. To set or change a
preset station, press and hold any of the memory presets buttons (1–6)
or any of the soft key memory preset buttons on the screen while on the
desired station. The new station will replace the previous one recorded.
Satellite radio (SAT) if activated
Once the Satellite Radio feature is activated, your system will have
additional features.
1. Ensure that the system is on.
2. Press the RADIO hard button.
3. Select the ‘SAT’ tab on the touchscreen to enter satellite radio mode
(if activated).
42
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
4. Press ‘Show Options’ to select from:
Sat 123: You will be able to access
three different Satellite Radio
modes, SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3.
Scan: Press to hear a brief sampling of satellite radio channels within
the currently selected genre. Press again to stop.
Scan Presets: Press to hear a brief sampling of all preset channels.
Channel Guide: Press to display a list of satellite radio channels sorted
by genre and also to skip or lock out certain channels. Select the desired
genre and choose a channel by pressing the channel name button. You
can then choose to ‘Skip’ or ‘Lock’ a certain channel. A ‘skipped’ channel
will not be accessible using the tune knob, scan or seek functions. (To
access the skipped channel, select ‘Direct Tune’ and enter the channel
number.) A ‘locked’ channel can only be accessed by entering the
‘Channel Guide’ and then entering the PIN.
Note: The PIN can be reset by simultaneously pressing and holding
presets 1 and 5 while on the PIN entry screen. After approximately five
seconds, the system will transition to the Channel Guide screen
indicating that the PIN is reset. Once you have reset the PIN, the system
will then allow you to set a new PIN.
Direct Tune: Press to enter a specific channel using the keypad and go
directly to that channel.
Set Genre: Press to choose from a list of possible satellite radio genres.
Once a genre is chosen and you press SEEK, it will only seek within the
selected genre.
Memo: The MEMO feature allows you to save a song title and artist to
the system. When the saved song is playing on any satellite radio
channel, the system will alert you with a pop-up in the lower status bar.
You can then choose to tune to the station or to ignore the pop-up.
When you are in the MEMO screen, the following options are available:
• Refresh: Press to refresh the current artist and title information.
43
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• Song Alert: Press to store the song information displayed in the Title
Field. When the stored song is played in the future, an audio and
visual notification will be initiated.
• Artist Alert: Press to store the artist information currently displayed
in the Artist Field. When that artist is played again, the system will
alert you with a pop-up.
• Alert On/Off: Press to enable/disable the audio and visual song and
artists alerts.
Show Presets: Press to display presets at the bottom of the screen.
Playing a CD or MP3 disc
If you press CD and there is not a disc loaded into the system, NO DISC
will appear in the status bar and you will not be able to access the CD
screen. Insert a disc into the slot and it will begin to play.
You can access the following
CD/MP3 options:
Scan: Press for a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Compress (Compression): Press to engage/disengage the compression
feature. Compression boosts more quiet music and lowers louder music
to minimize the need for volume adjustments.
Repeat: Press to engage/disengage the repeat feature. The system will
keep playing the same track continually.
Shuffle: Press to engage disengage the shuffle feature. The system will
play all tracks on the disc randomly.
Track List: Available in CD mode only. Press to view a list of tracks on
the CD.
Record: Available in CD mode only. Press to record and save the CD or
any track(s) on the CD to the Jukebox. You can then later access/play
the saved tracks/CD.
Folder mode: Available in MP3 mode only. Press to activate folder
mode. When activated, song play and seeking stays within the current
folder.
44
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Folder List: Available in MP3 mode only. Press to access/view a list of
folders on the disc. Select the root folder (if available). You may then
select from all possible folders on the disc.
: Press to access the previous track. Press and hold to reverse in
the current track.
/
(Play/Pause) : Press to play or pause the current track.
: Press to access the next track. Press and hold to advance within
the current track.
Press SEEK
) track.
Playing a DVD in the system
hard button to listen to the next (
) or previous
(
1. Ensure that the vehicle and the system are on and that the vehicle is
in P (Park). This will allow you to be able to view and hear the DVD. If
the vehicle is moving, you will only be able to hear the audio.
2. Insert a DVD into the system, label side up. The system will
automatically go into DVD mode.
You can then select any of the
following options on the
touchscreen:
: Press to access the previous chapter. Press and hold to reverse in
the current chapter.
/
(Play/Pause) : Press to play or pause the DVD.
: Press to access the next chapter. Press and hold to advance
within the current chapter.
(Stop): Press to stop the current track.
Title: Goes to the main title screen stored on the disc.
Menu: Goes to the main menu of the disc.
Cursor controls: Use these controls to navigate to the desired menu
selections.
45
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Search: Press to select and go to a specific title or chapter using the
keypad.
Settings: Allows you to adjust the certain settings of the DVD player,
such as:
• Video Display Settings: Press to adjust the brightness and contrast.
You can also choose to return to the default settings by pressing
‘Restore Default’.
• Audio Language: Press to select which language you would like the
DVD to display.
• Subtitle Display: Press to turn subtitles on/off.
• Subtitle Language: Press to select in which language you would like
the subtitles to appear.
• Aspect Ratio: Press to select from wide, full, normal and cinema
display.
• Angle Mark Notification: Some DVD discs may have more viewing
angles from which to select. Once you have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm. This is disc dependent feature.
Note: Some of the above settings are DVD dependent and
availability/operation will vary among DVDs.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol
are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
During DVD play, you can also
touch the screen to access the
‘virtual remote’ which will allow you
to ‘Move controls’ on the screen as
well as use the cursor controls,
‘Enter’ and ‘Return’ to navigate and
make selections within the menus.
Jukebox
Your mobile media system has a Jukebox which allows you to save
desired tracks or CDs to the hard drive for later access. The hard drive
can store up to 10 GB* (164 hours; approximately 2,472 tracks) of
music. The system contains a Gracenote media database that allows for
46
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
display of song title, album title, and album cover art. After saving music
to the hard drive, you can access and play your music by specific tracks,
artists, albums or genres. You can even choose to create and access your
own playlists.
*Note: 1 GB equals one billion bytes (1,000,000,000B).
Recording (saving) music to your jukebox
1. Ensure that the system is on.
2. Insert a CD into the system. The CD tab will appear.
3. Select ‘Record’ on the
touchscreen.
4. Select either individual tracks or
press ‘Select All’ to record the entire
CD. Note: The system will default
to selecting all tracks if none are
selected.
5. Press ‘Start Recording’. The
progress will show at the bottom of
the screen.
When the recording process is finished, the system will save your
track(s) / CD to the Jukebox.
Note: If you are not actively listening to the disc being recorded, the
record rate is much quicker (as fast as five minutes).
Accessing the music in your jukebox
Once you have saved music to your jukebox, you can then choose
several ways to play your favorite music. To access:
1. Press the MEDIA hard button.
47
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
2. Select the ‘Jukebox’ tab on the
touchscreen. You can then select
from the following options:
Scan: Press for a brief sampling of the currently selected CD, playlist,
genre, etc. Press again to disengage.
Repeat: Press to repeat the current CD, playlist, etc. Press again to
disengage.
Shuffle: Press to shuffle all the tracks on the current CD, playlist, etc. in
random order. Press again to disengage.
Music library: Press to access all of your saved music. You can choose
to view/play the material in the following ways:
• Play all tracks: Select to play all tracks saved in the jukebox.
• Playlist: Select to play your own playlist.
• Play genre: Select to have the system play only music from a specific
genre.
• Play artist: Select to have the system play only music by a specific
artist.
• Play album: Select to have the system play only music from a specific
album.
Options: Select to view your other options:
• Edit Playlists: Select to edit your playlists.
• Edit Music Library Contents: Select to make changes to the
content in your music library.
• Update Album Information from CD Database: Select to update
the residing album information from the Gracenote database if a
recent software update was performed.
• Hard Disk Drive Information: Select to access the system’s hard
drive disc information such as used/free space and total capacity.
• CD Database Information: Select to access the CD database
information.
48
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Creating a playlist
1. Press the MEDIA hard button.
2. Select the ‘Jukebox’ tab on the touchscreen.
3. Select ‘Options’.
4. Select ‘Edit Playlists’.
5. Select which playlist you would like to create.
6. Select which category you would like to access from your saved music.
For example, say you chose one saved album from which to select songs.
7. Select the desired songs and then press ‘Add’.
The system will show you your currently selected songs. You can choose
to add more tracks to your playlist, sort the playlist, delete the playlist or
to edit the name of the playlist.
8. When you are done making any adjustment to the playlist, select ‘Edit
Name’ to rename your playlist.
You can then access your playlist by that name.
User device
Your vehicle is equipped with
SYNC. Press the ’User Device’ tab
to access your SYNC media
options. For more information,
please refer to the SYNC media
features chapter in your SYNC
supplement.
Rear DVD interaction (if equipped)
Your mobile media system allows you to access the Family Entertainment
DVD System (if equipped) as well as perform basic functions. To access:
1. Press the MEDIA hard button.
2. Select the ‘Rear DVD’ tab on the touchscreen. You may now select
from the following options:
: Press to access the previous track. Press and hold to reverse in
the current track.
: Press to access the next track. Press and hold to advance within
the current track.
49
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
/
(Play/Pause): Press to play or pause the current track.
Rear Zone (if equipped)
This screen allows front seat passengers to select/listen to a different
audio/video source than the back seat passengers. The only restriction is
that the front and back seat passengers cannot both listen to a different
frequency band (AM/FM1/FM2). The frequency band selected by the
driver is the band accessible by the rear passenger. To access:
1. Ensure that the mobile media system is on.
2. Press the MEDIA or RADIO hard button.
3. Select the ‘Rear Zone’ tab on the touchscreen.
The screen will show you the
selected playing media of the
different headsets (A and B). To
make adjustments, ensure that the
correct headset (A or B) is
highlighted. The appropriate
controls will appear to allow you to
make adjustments to your current
playing media.
•
•
•
(Reverse): Press for reverse play.
/
(Play/Pause): Press to play or pause the DVD.
(Fast forward): Press for advance play.
SEEK: You may press the SEEK hard button for the next (
previous ( ) chapter.
) or
• Media: Press to select the desired media in the selected headset (A
or B).
• Rear Controls Enabled/Disabled: Press to turn the Rear Controls
(if equipped) on/off.
• Headphones On/Off: Press to turn the headphones on/off.
Rear zone/climate control
Your mobile media system allows you to access and make adjustments to
the front and rear zone climate controls.
To access, press the CLIMATE hard button. Refer to the Climate
Controls chapter for further information.
50
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Calendar
• Press the I button and then select
the ‘Calendar’ tab.
You can then select which month
you would like to view by
pressing
/
or you can also
select ‘Go to Today’.
• You are able to view calendars
from one previous year and the
next 10 years.
Note: Not all tab selections shown here will be available in all markets.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
System information
• Press the I hard button (
and then select the ‘System
Information’ tab on the
touchscreen.
)
In this screen you can view the following options:
• Phone number for your Customer Service Center
• Current SIRIUS Radio ESN
Help
The Help screen allows you to view basic information about controls and
driving restrictions as well as traffic legend information and basic voice
commands available in various modes. To access:
• Press the I hard button (
) and then select the ‘Help’ tab.
51
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Select ‘Basic Operation’ at the top of
the screen to view the hard buttons
on your mobile media system. Press
the desired icon to view the button
description.
Select ‘Driving Restriction’ at the
top of the screen to view the
system’s driving restriction.
Select ‘SYNC Voice Commands’ at
the top of the screen. When
selected, the system will show you a
brief listing of possible voice
commands in that specific mode.
Sound features
The sound menu allows you to access and adjust settings such as Bass,
Treble, Fade, Balance, Digital Signal Processing (DSP), Speed
compensated volume (SCV) and the visualizer. To access:
1. Press the SOUND hard button.
52
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
2. Press the appropriate tab to select from:
Bass/Treble: Press + to increase or
— to decrease the levels.
Balance/Fade: Press to adjust the
sound between the left and right
speakers (Balance) and to adjust
the sound to the front and rear
speakers (Fade).
SCV (Speed compensated volume):
With this feature on, the radio
volume changes automatically with
vehicle speed to compensate for
road and wind noise. Select a level
of compensation between 1 and 7 by
pressing the corresponding button.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing):
Depending on your option package,
you may either select from ‘Stereo’
or ‘Surround Sound’.
53
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Or, you may choose to optimize the
sound quality for ‘All Seats’, ‘Driver
Seat’ or ‘Rear Seat’.
Visualizer: Press to turn the audio
visualizer display on or off.
Note: Turning the visualizer setting
to off will not remove the visualizer
on the home screen. You will need
to select a different view in order to
remove the visualizer.
THX Demo (if equipped): Select
this tab to activate the THX audio
demonstration. You may press “X” to
stop the demonstration.
Ordering Gracenote update DVDs
If you wish to order an updated DVD, please contact Ford Customer
Service.
• In USA: 1 (800) 392–3673
• In Canada: 1 (800) 565–3673.
• In Mexico: 1 (800) 719–8466
54
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
System Software Updates
Updates for the Gracenote database (CDDB) that contain CD
song/artist/title/album art are available. There is no charge for the data,
however, there is a nominal shipping and materials fee. Mapping updates
will be available yearly. Gracenote database (CDDB) database updates
are complimentary when a map update is purchased.
FCC Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could
void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits with the Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Gracenote copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright
2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ЉPowered by GracenoteЉ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
55
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to
perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If
so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data
shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music
file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including
all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any information that you
provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information. You
agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or
separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company’s
own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA
AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.”
NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY
OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND
56
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN
THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY
CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT
THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS
NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR
ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS
ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
Gracenote 2007
System limitations
Cold temperature start: When operating the system below 32°F (0°C),
the display screen requires a 2–3 minutes warm-up time to achieve
maximum brightness.
Cleaning the touchscreen
Clean the touchscreen with a clean soft cloth such as one used for
cleaning glasses. If dirt or finger prints are still visible, apply a small
amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour/spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen. Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the
touchscreen.
Frequently asked questions (FAQs)
How do I turn off the system?
Press and hold the volume control for at least three seconds.
How do I recover after accidental language re-set?
1. Press the MENU hard button.
2. Select the ‘Feedback settings’/Retour/Reaccion tab on the touchscreen.
57
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
3. Press the ‘English’/Anglais/Ingles button to reset language to English.
4. Press the ‘Spanish’/Espanol/Espanol button to reset language to
Spanish.
5. Press the ‘French’/Francais/Frances button to reset language to
French.
Or, you can also turn vehicle off to restart system. Then from the
DISCLAIMER screen, select the desired language before pressing ‘Agree’.
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Focus Error
Possible Cause
System unable to play
reproduced disc.
Disc was inserted
upside down or the
system is unable to
read the information
in the disc.
Action
Contact your
authorized dealer.
The mechanism will
automatically eject
disc.
Bad Disc
Track Error
The system is unable
The system will skip
to reproduce a corrupt the corrupted track.
MP3 file.
Invalid Disc Detected
Dirty CD/DVD or
unsupported format
Wipe the CD/DVD with
a dry, soft cloth from
the center to the outer
edge of the disc.
Error. PINs did not
A different PIN was
Press OK and try
match. Please re-enter. entered to unlock the entering PIN again. If
(Popup window)
system for valet mode. unable, contact your
authorized dealer.
Invalid PIN. Please
Re-enter. (Popup
window)
System does not
recognize PIN as valid. different PIN to lock
the system.
Press OK and enter
Audio system–Navigation system based (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, it will have an
integrated navigation/audio system. See the Navigation system
supplement for operating instructions on using this audio system.
58
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Auxiliary input jack (Line in)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
The auxiliary input jack provides a
way to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal
performance, please observe the
following instructions when
attaching your portable music
device to the audio system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to Auxiliary
input jack section in the Audio Features chapter of your Navigation
System supplement.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
59
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
60
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle is equipped with a USB
port inside your center console. This
feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, and
also to charge devices if they
support this feature. For further
information on this feature, refer to
Accessing and using your USB
port in the SYNC supplement or
Navigation System supplement.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.
61
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• Wipe discs from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or
qualified technician.
62
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255.
Note: The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less
depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
.mp3
.mp3
1
1
2
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various
files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored
by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in vehicle
system.
3
.mp3
2
3
4
5
.mp3
.mp3
.mp3
4
6
7
.mp3
.doc
.ppt
.xls
63
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
Satellite radio (if activated)
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a
subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming.
Your factory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes: hardware
and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease
of the vehicle and an online media player providing access to all SIRIUS
music channels over the internet. Please contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 for extended subscription terms as a service fee is
required in order to receive SIRIUS service. Refer to your authorized
dealer for availability.
For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca
in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: Your satellite radio antenna is
located on the roof of your vehicle as this provides the best location for
an unobstructed, open view of the sky. Factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance are:
• Antenna Obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
You will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal
interference. Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): When
communicating with SIRIUS, you will need to give your Satellite Radio
ESN Number. This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate,
modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is found on the
System Information Screen (SR ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). Press the I
hard button (
) and select the ‘System Info’ tab on the touchscreen.
64
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Radio Display
ACQUIRING
Condition
Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
Internal module or
system failure
Action Required
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
SAT FAULT
If this message does
not clear within a short
period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
present.
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHANNEL
Channel no longer
available.
This previously
available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
Contact SIRIUS at
UNSUBSCRIBED
CHANNEL
Subscription not
available for this
channel.
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
65
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Radio Display
NO SIGNAL
Condition
Action Required
You are in a location
that is blocking the
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,
tunnel, under an
Loss of signal from
the SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to the
vehicle antenna.
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
UPDATING
Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
CALL SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS Satellite
Radio.
Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
re-activate or resolve
subscription issues.
FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System
(FES) which allows you to listen to audio CDs, MP3 discs, watch DVDs
and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems. The
headrest-mounted DVD players are capable of playing standard DVDs,
CDs, MP3s and are compatible with Video CD, HDCD, Hybrid SACD
(play CD layer only), SVCD, DVD-video, JPEGs, up to MPEG-4 files, MP3
files and WMA media. Please review this material to become familiar with
the FES features and controls as well as the very important safety
information.
66
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Quick start
Your family entertainment system includes two headrest-mounted DVD
player/screens, two sets of wireless infrared (IR) headphones and a
wireless infrared (IR) remote control capable of controlling either DVD
player. Both DVD players are capable of playing their own independent
media, or they can both watch the same media.
When in single play mode, the headrest video sources that have been
selected at each headrest will play through the speakers, but no audio is
available through the headphones.
To play a DVD
1. Insert a DVD into the system, label side facing the rear passengers.
The disc slot indicator lights will illuminate. The system will
automatically load the disc and it will begin to play. LOADING will
appear in the screen.
2. If there is already a disc in the system, press the power button on the
DVD system and then press
(Play) to begin to play the disc.
3. Use the bezel controls to play (
) pause ( ), stop (
), or
eject (
Press
) a DVD.
to access the previous/next chapter. Press and hold for a
/
fast reverse/forward search.
Note: The system goes into dual play mode when it is turned on. Audio
from the DVD system will not play over the rear two speakers until dual
play mode is turned off. When dual play mode is turned on, the audio
sound plays over the front two speakers until dual play mode is turned
off.
Note: Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier (either A or B)
found in the upper right corner of the system.
To watch a DVD playing in the other headrest system: Press MEDIA
repeatedly until the desired system (Monitor A or Monitor B) appears in
the display.
67
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
To play a CD or MP3 disc
The DVD system can play audio CDs, CD-R and CD-R/W, CD-ROM. To
ensure proper disc operation, check the disc for finger prints and
scratches. Clean the disc with a soft cloth, wiping from the center to the
edge.
1. Insert a disc into the system,
label side facing the rear
passengers. The disc slot indicator
lights will illuminate. The system
will automatically load the disc and
it will begin to play. (If it is an MP3,
the MP3 audio disc screen will
display and allow you to access the
folders and files.) The folder, track
and elapsed time will appear in the
status bar. The screen will list the
title, album and file name. Press the arrow controls on the headrest DVD
system to scroll through the folders. When the desired folder is
highlighted, press SEL to confirm the selection.
2. If there is already a disc in the system, press the power button on the
DVD system and then press
(Play) to begin to play the disc.
To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system
The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic
devices (game systems, personal camcorders, video cassette recorders,
etc) and to connect to and access certain files through your USB port.
1. On the front of each monitor,
located behind the left trim cover
panel, is the headphone input jack
(5). This headphone will listen to
the media selected through that
MEDIA
monitor. When you need to make
any adjustments to the media,
volume, etc., ensure that the
monitor-A source is highlighted.
4
5
68
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• USB port (4): To access, ensure that the monitor is already selected
as the media source (Monitor A or Monitor B.) Then, plug in your
flash/thumb drive and it will automatically begin to play. The system
will try to play whatever file it comes to first (slideshow of pictures,
etc). If it is a supported file type, it will play. If it is not supported,
CAN’T PLAY will appear in the monitor. Scroll through the contents on
the rest of the drive using the arrow keys on the DVD headrest or
remote. Press SEL to confirm a selection. Each headrest system
automatically recognizes the audio and video files that are stored and
provides a menu from which to choose the desired selection.
• Wired headphone jack (5): Use for dual play mode
2. Connect an auxiliary audio/video
source (game systems, personal
camcorders, video cassette
recorders, etc.) by connecting RCA
cords (not included) to the RCA
jacks behind the cover panels on the
right corner of the system.
• Yellow (1) — video input
• White (2) — left channel audio
input
• Red (3) — right channel audio input
3. Whatever is plugged in will automatically begin to play on your screen.
If your auxiliary source does not have a video signal, or if the DVD
system does not detect a video signal from the auxiliary source, the
screen will remain black.
69
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
DVD player controls
10
9
MENU
SEL
MEDIA
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1.
/
(Play/Pause): Press to play or pause a CD, DVD or
flash/thumb drive track.
2.
(Stop): Press to stop the current DVD, CD/MP3, or flash/thumb
drive track.
3.
(Eject): Press to eject a disc from the DVD system.
4. MENU: When playing a DVD, press MENU to enter the DVD disc
(root) menu (if available). Press again to exit and return to the movie.
SEL: Press to confirm the current selection that has been highlighted
through the use of the cursor controls.
Cursor controls: Use to navigate through selections when in any menu.
When not in a menu, you can also use them for the following features:
•
•
/
Use to scroll through menu sources.
(Fast forward/next): Press to access the next track or chapter.
Press and hold to activate fast forward mode (2x, 4x, 8x, 16x or 32x).
(Fast reverse/previous): Press to access the previous track or
chapter. Press and hold to activate fast reverse within a disc.
•
Press
(Play) to resume normal playback speed and volume.
70
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
5.
/
(Headphones/Speakers): Press to activate dual play mode on
either headrest system. During dual play mode, the following happens:
a. Rear speakers turn off
b. Headphones become active on both headrest systems.
c. Media sources become available through the DVD systems.
Note: If the system is in dual play mode, you must press the
/
(Headphones/Speakers) button on both headrest systems in order to
return to single play. For more information, please refer to Single
play/Dual play later in this section.
6. MEDIA for Monitor A: In Dual Play mode, press MEDIA repeatedly
to select from the possible media sources: (Monitor A, Monitor B, AM,
FM1, FM2, SR1, SR2, SR3 (satellite radio, if equipped), Disc, Jukebox (if
equipped) and SYNC (if equipped). The selected media type will
display on the screen. When Monitor A is chosen, you can also use the
auxiliary inputs and the USB port on the headrest system.
MEDIA for Monitor B: In Dual Play mode, press MEDIA repeatedly to
select from the possible media sources: (Monitor A, Monitor B). The
selected media type will display on the screen. When Monitor B is
chosen, you can also use the auxiliary inputs and USB port on the
headrest system.
For further information, please refer to Single play/Dual play later in
this section.
Note: Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier (either A or B)
found in the upper right corner of the system.
7.
(On/Off): Press to turn the system on/off. Power for headrest A is
separate from headrest B.
Note: This also disables dual play. When both headrest systems are
turned off, the system will return to single play mode.
8. Infrared receiver (IR): System sensor which reads the signals from
the remote control and also sends audio signals to the infrared wireless
headphones.
9. LCD screen: This seven inch liquid crystal display (LCD) screen can
be adjusted for easier viewing by children. Pull the top of the screen
panel toward the viewer at the IR receiver/transmitter cover for a better
viewing angle. The screen is hinged at the bottom and pivots to face
downward. Push the screen back in place until it latches to return it to a
stowed position.
Note: Ensure that you do not pull the LCD screen too far forward as it
can cause damage.
10. CD/DVD slot: Insert the disc, label side facing the rear passengers.
71
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Remote control
Unless otherwise stated, all operations can be carried out with the
remote control. Always point the remote control directly at the player.
Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player.
Press the MON A B control to select either Monitor A or Monitor B.
Note: Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier (either A or B)
found in the upper right corner of the system.
Note: Use the remote to adjust the volume levels for wired headphones
for headrest media sources only (DVD, USB port and auxiliary inputs).
To adjust the volume levels on the infrared wireless headphones
(provided with your system), use the rotary volume control on the side
of the headphones.
1.
(On/off): Press to turn each monitor/headrest system on or off.
2. Cursor controls: Use in various active menus to advance the cursor
up/down/left/right. When not in a menu, the left and right cursor controls
decrease and increase the display brightness.
3. DISPLAY: Press to access the on-screen display of title track, chapter
and time elapsed.
72
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
4. RETURN: Press to return to the previous menu screen.
5. SETUP: Press to access the setup menu for each monitor. Refer to
Setup Menu later in this section for more information.
6. MON A/B: Press to select either monitor A or monitor B to be
controlled by the remote control.
7. VOL (Volume): When in Dual Play only, press to increase (
) or
decrease ( ) the volume for the wired headphones for headrest media
sources only (DVD, USB port and auxiliary inputs). (Wireless headphone
volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece.)
8. Fast Forward/Next: In DVD mode, press and hold for a quick
advance within the DVD. Press and release to advance to the next
chapter. In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the next track. When using a
flash/thumb drive, press to access the next track.
9. Play/Pause: Press to play or pause a DVD, disc or flash/thumb drive
track.
10. TITLE: Press to access the on-screen display of the root DVD disc
menu.
11. STOP: Press to stop the current DVD, disc or flash/thumb drive
track.
12.
/
Speaker/Headphone (Single/Dual Play): Press to switch
between Single Play (same media playing through all speakers) and Dual
Play (headphone mode, the rear speakers are muted). You can also press
the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time to
perform the same function.
Note: Whenever either headrest system presses this button, both
systems will automatically go into dual play mode. In order to return to
single play mode, you must press this button on both headrest systems.
13. Numeric Keypad: Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific
CD/MP3 track or DVD chapter to be played.
14. C (Cancel): Press to cancel/clear the numeric input (i.e. chapter
number).
15. MEDIA for Monitor A: In Dual Play mode, press MEDIA repeatedly
to select from the possible media sources: (Monitor A, Monitor B, AM,
FM1, FM2, SR1, SR2, SR3 (satellite radio, if equipped), Disc, Jukebox (if
equipped) and SYNC (if equipped). The selected media type will
display on the screen. When Monitor A is chosen, you can also use the
auxiliary inputs and the USB port on the headrest system.
73
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
MEDIA for Monitor B: In Dual Play mode, press MEDIA repeatedly to
select from the possible media sources: (Monitor A, Monitor B). The
selected media type will display on the screen. When Monitor B is
chosen, you can also use the auxiliary inputs and USB port on the
headrest system.
For further information, please refer to Single play/Dual play later in
this section.
Note: Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier (either A or B)
found in the upper right corner of the system.
16. MUTE: Press to mute the volume of the active media source.
(headphone and speakers, where applicable.) Press again to restore
volume.
17. EJECT: Press to eject a disc from the system. OPEN will display on
the screen.
18. Fast reverse/Previous: When a DVD is playing, press and hold for a
quick reverse within the DVD. Press and release for the previous
chapter. Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume.
In CD/MP3 mode, press to access the previous track. When using a
flash/thumb drive, press to access the next track.
19. MENU: Press to access the DVD or CD disc menu for selections.
Press again to return to DVD play.
Note: For certain discs, you may need to press ENTER to return to DVD
play.
20. SUBTITLE (DVD dependent): Press to turn the subtitle feature ON
or OFF.
21. LANGUAGE (DVD dependent): Press to select the desired
language.
22. ENTER: Press to select the highlighted menu option.
23. ILLUMINATION: Press to illuminate the remote control and
backlight all of the buttons for night use.
74
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Battery replacement
Batteries are supplied with the
remote control unit. Since all
batteries have a limited shelf life,
replace them when the unit fails to
control the DVD player.
Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries.
The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with
the unit.
Headphones
Wireless headphones
WARNING: The driver should never use the headphones while
driving the vehicle. Using headphones may prevent the driver
from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens,
which could result in a crash causing serious injury. Give your full
attention to driving and to the road.
Your FES system is equipped with two sets of battery powered, infrared
wireless headphones. Two AAA batteries are needed to operate the
headphones. (Batteries are included.)
75
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Additional infrared wireless headphones may be purchased for use with
the system. Also, wired headphones may be purchased and plugged in
where indicated on the left and right hand sides of the system. Refer to
Wired Headphones following.
To install the batteries, remove
the screw on the cover and remove
the cover. Then, gently lift the top
of the cover away from the housing
to expose the battery compartment.
When replacing the batteries, use
two new batteries (alkaline
recommended) and install them
with the correct orientation as
indicated in the battery housing.
Replace the cover and thread the
screw.
Fold-flat feature: In addition to
headband adjustment, your new
wireless headphones will lock into
position when being used and they
can also fold-flat feature for ease of
storage. Simply rotate each earpiece
until they lock into position or fold
flat.
To operate the headphones:
• Press POWER on the ear piece to
turn on the headphones. A red
indicator light will illuminate
indicating the headphones are
ON. Press POWER again to turn
the headphones off.
• Adjust the headphones to
comfortably fit your head using
the headband adjustment.
• Select the desired audio source (Channel/Monitor A or B) for each set
of wireless headphones by using the A/B selection switch on the ear
piece.
76
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
• Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level.
Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use. After
approximately one minute of not being in use (no infrared signal is
received), the wireless headphones will automatically turn off. They will
also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature.
If this happens, simply turn the headphones on again and continue use.
Wired headphones
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children operate the system while unsupervised. If
wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: The driver should never use the headphones while
driving the vehicle. Using headphones may prevent the driver
from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens,
which could result in a crash causing serious injury. Give your full
attention to driving and to the road.
Wired headphone jacks on the FES (Family Entertainment System) are
universal so you may purchase and use additional wired headphones for
your system. Plug them into the 3.5 mm headphone jack(s) located
behind the trim covers on the face of each monitor. These headphones
will be active when in Dual Play mode.
To listen to the audio on wired headphones (not included), connect the
wired headphones into the monitor headphone jacks. Available wired
headphone sources are limited to the sources available to whichever
monitor is being listened to. Adjust the volume using the volume control
on the DVD system remote control.
Operation
Single play/Dual play
Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones
and wired headphones (not included) to allow the rear seat passengers
to listen to the radio (and other media sources) over the headphones.
This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of
sources a variety of ways.
Single Play: Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening
to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers. When the
DVD system is on and in single play, the same source will play through
all vehicle speakers.
77
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Dual Play: Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen
to a different playing media than the front seat passengers. With the
DVD and rear seat controls turned on, the rear seat passengers may
choose to listen to: Monitor A, Monitor B, AM, FM1, FM2 SR1, SR2, SR3
(satellite radio, if equipped), Disc, Jukebox (if equipped), or SYNC (if
equipped). While the front speakers play the chosen selection for the
front audio system, the rear seat passengers can listen to another over
the headphones. The headphone icon will appear in the display
indicating that the headphones are active.
You can access dual play mode in any of the following ways:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen system:
a. Ensure that the vehicle ignition is turned on. Inserting a DVD into
the system will automatically activate dual play mode.
b. Press the RADIO or MEDIA hard button. Select the ‘Rear Zone’ tab
on the touchscreen and select ‘On’ for the headphones and ‘Enabled’
for the rear controls. To return to single zone, select ‘Off’ for the
headphones.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a non-touchscreen system:
a. Press the headphone/speaker (
/
) button on the remote
control or DVD system. Press again on both headrest systems to
return to single play mode.
b. Press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the radio at the same time.
Press again to return to single play mode.
Note: If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio, the rear seat
passengers can also listen to the radio; however, they will be limited to
listening to the same radio channel.
• Once you have entered Dual play mode, the Channel A or Channel B
controls on the headphones are now active. Both Channel A and
Channel B can be listened to on the wired headphones (not included)
or on the infrared (IR) wireless headphones.
• On the wireless headphones, select the Channel A or Channel B
buttons on each pair of wireless headphones.
• Press MEDIA to change the audio source for the Channel A or
Channel B headphones. (This information will display on the DVD
system screen).
Note: Channel B headphones can only listen to either the DVD media,
Monitor A or the DVD system auxiliary inputs. Channel A headphones
have access to all available media sources.
78
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Radio interaction: If your vehicle is equipped with a non-touchscreen
audio system, you can press AUX on the radio repeatedly until DVD
appears in the display. Then, press MENU to access HEADPHONES
ON/OFF, REAR ZONE CONTROL ON/OFF and other options. Turn the
TUNE control to select ON/OFF for HEADPHONES (ON will activate
Dual Play and OFF will activate Single Play). For the REAR ZONE
CONTROL, selecting ON will give the rear seat passengers control over
the DVD system and selecting OFF will turn off control for the rear seat
passengers.
When accessing radio or satellite radio media sources in dual play
mode, press SEL on the DVD headrest A system when the desired
selection appears in the screen and then press
reverse/advance through any saved presets.
/
to
When accessing SYNC in dual
play mode, press SEL on DVD
headrest monitor A when SYNC
appears on the screen then
press
/
to scroll through
SYNC media options of: USB,
Bluetooth, Line in (auxiliary audio
mode) and Exit.
Supported USB devices: To help ensure compatibility, the DVD system
has been tested with most brands of flash/thumb devices and most
common personal audio players.
Setup menu options
To access the set up menu, first select the desired headrest/monitor
system by pressing MON A or MON B. Then press SETUP on the remote
control.
Note: This is the only way to gain access to the Setup menu options.
You cannot access from the monitor headrest controls.
Note: On any of the following screens, press
/
to access the
previous/next menu level.
79
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Aspect ratio (TV display type)
This screen allows you to select the
viewing size and shape of the video
displayed on the LCD screen. This is
disc dependent feature.
To access:
1. Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options.
2. Press
beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection.)
3. Press to select and enter the TV display menu.
4. When TV display is highlighted, press to enter the menu.
5. Press to select from the following settings:
/
to ’highlight’ the monitor icon. (A disc will appear
/
• Normal P/S (Pan and Scan): Displays the wide picture on the screen
with a portion of the left and right sides removed.
• Normal L/B (Letter-Box): Displays the wide picture with black bands
on the upper and lower portions of the screen.
• Wide: Displays the wide picture.
6. When the desired selection is highlighted, press ENTER on the remote
control to confirm the selection.
OSD language
This screen allows you to select the
language you would like for use with
the DVD player commands and
set-up screens.
To access:
1. Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options.
80
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
2. Press
/
to ’highlight’ the monitor icon. (A disc will appear
beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection.)
3. Press to select and enter the OSD language menu.
4. When OSD Lang is highlighted, press to access the menu.
5. Press to select from all available languages.
/
6. When the desired language is highlighted, press ENTER on the remote
to confirm the selection.
Note: The default language is English.
Angle mark
This feature allows you to select
from different viewing angles that
may be found on the disc. This is a
disc dependent feature. If the DVD
does not have this capability, it will
not be available.
Note: This is a disc dependent
feature.
To access:
1. Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options.
2. Press
beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection.)
3. Press to select and enter the TV display menu.
/
to ’highlight’ the monitor icon. (A disc will appear
4. When Angle Mark is highlighted, press to access the menu.
5. Press to select from all available angles.
/
6. When the desired language is highlighted, press ENTER on the remote
to confirm the selection.
81
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Speaker setup
This screen allows you to adjust the
audio balance for your speakers. To
access:
1. Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options.
2. Press
beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection.)
3. Press to select and enter the Speaker set up menu.
4. When Downmix is highlighted, press to access the menu.
/
to ’highlight’ the speaker icon. (A disc will appear
5. Press to select from left/right and stereo.
/
6. When the desired selection is highlighted, press ENTER on the remote
to confirm.
Video setup
The video setup screen allows you
to adjust the quality of the video
image for each headrest monitor. To
access:
1. Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options.
2. Press
/
to ’highlight’ the film reel icon. (A disc will appear
beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection.)
3. Press
82
to select and enter the Video setup menu.
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
4. Press
/
to chose from Sharpness, Brightness, contrast, color
(gamma), hue, saturation and luma-delay.
General setup — screen exit
To exit the setup screen:
1. Press
/
to ’highlight’ the
“X” icon. (A disc will appear
beneath the icon signifying it is the
current selection.)
2. Press ENTER on the remote
control.
Parental control for the DVD system
Your Family Entertainment System (FES) allows you to have control
over the rear seat controls in a few different ways. The DVD system is
automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is on, which allows the
rear seat passengers to use the DVD system.
There are two levels of control of the FES buttons. The states are FULL
(enabled), or LOCKED (disabled). To change the level of control, press
the memory preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio
controls. The control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed
simultaneously. The three states are described as:
FULL (enabled): The FES has control over the primary (speaker) and
secondary (headphone) audio sources.
LOCKED (disabled): The FES buttons are locked and all FES button
presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject.
When the DVD system is ON, you can then press the memory preset
controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to toggle between Single Play and Dual
Play. In Single Play mode, all speakers listen to the same media. In Dual
Play mode, rear seat passengers can use the infrared wireless, or wired
(not included) headphones to listen to a different playing media than the
front seat passengers.
83
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
General information
Note: DVDs are formatted by
regions. US and Canada systems can
only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico
systems can only play region 4
DVDs. Systems sold in vehicles
targeted for other parts of the world
would have different regions. If a
playback problem is encountered,
please ensure that you are using a
disc designed for your vehicle. The
region coding can be found stamped
on the disc or on the box, and can say ‘region-1’ or ‘region 4’, etc. They
may also be marked by a numerical symbol.
Macrovision: This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
MP3, MPG, WAV, JPG, WMA, HDCD (and all other file types
referenced in this Owner’s Guide): Supply of this product only
conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a
license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e.
revenue generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable
and /or any other media) broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets
and/or other networks or in other electronic content distribution
systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications. An
independent license for such use is required. For details, please visit
http:// www.mp3licensing.com.
Safety information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe
operation of their vehicle. Only use cell phones and other devices not
essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so.
84
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the
system and retain for future reference.
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Family Entertainment
System (FES). See your dealer.
Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment.
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children operate the system while unsupervised. If
wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD)
flip-down screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the
glass breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of
contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.
WARNING: The driver should not attempt to operate any
function of the DVD system while the vehicle is in motion. Give
full attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road in a safe
place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system. A remote
control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to
operate the FES functions without distracting the driver.
Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive
periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal.
Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game
equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment
System (FES).
Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords
and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or
cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation
of seats and/or compartments.
Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables
when not in use.
Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on
them or allow them to get wet or dirty.
Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene, lacquer thinner,
acetone, or any other solvent.
85
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln-Mercury could
void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference and radio
communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Care and service of the DVD player
Environmental extremes
DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may
be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these
outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to:
• extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• direct sunlight.
• high humidity.
• a dusty environment.
• locations where strong magnetic fields are generated.
Temperature extremes
When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold
place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the
vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system.
Humidity and moisture condensation
Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely
humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one.
Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and/or player. If
moisture condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the
player. If one is already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON
to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or
more.
86
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entertainment Systems
Foreign substances
Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD
player compartment. Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind
onto the media controls or into the system. If liquid is accidentally
spilled onto the system, immediately turn the system OFF and consult a
qualified service technician.
Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) screen
Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any
ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the
screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not
spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray
from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the
screen and cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while
cleaning the screen.
Cleaning DVD and CD discs
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the
center out to the edge. Do not use circular motion.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the
Navigation System supplement for further information.
SYNCா
Your vehicle is equipped with SYNC, a hands-free communications and
entertainment system with special phone and media features. For more
information, please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC
section in the Navigation System supplement (if equipped).
87
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Climate system without navigation system shown; with navigation similar.
Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1. Climate: Press to control the climate control system through the
touch display screen. See Touchscreen functions later in this section.
2. Passenger temperature: Press to activate separate passenger
temperature control and turn the knob to increase/decrease the air
temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
3.
Passenger heated seat: Press to activate. Refer to Heated and
cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more
information.
4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C,
(defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
R
5.
Rear defroster: Press to activate/deactivate the rear window
defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more
information. This button will also activate the heated mirrors.
88
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
6.
Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
7.
Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle. The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off.
8.
Driver heated seat: Press to activate. Refer to Heated and
cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more
information.
9. Driver temperature: Press to increase/decrease the air temperature
on the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger
side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
10.
Driver cooled seat: Press to activate. Refer to Heated and
cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more
information.
11. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
12. –
+ Fan speed control: Press (- / +) to decrease/increase the
fan speed.
13.
Recirculated air: Press to activate/deactivate air recirculation
in the vehicle. Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to
cool down the interior of the vehicle when used with A/C and may also
help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can
be engaged manually in any airflow mode except
Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections
except MAX A/C.
14. Passenger cooled seat: Press to activate. Refer to Heated and
(defrost).
cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more
information.
89
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS
Temperature– Press the
up and
down arrows on the left side of
the screen to increase/decrease the airflow temperature for the driver
side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
Press the
up and
down arrows on the right side of the screen to
increase/decrease the airflow temperature for the passenger side of the
vehicle.
•
•
- Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
- Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
•
•
- Distributes air through the floor vents, rear seat floor vents.
- Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO on the main climate
control bezel.
Fan Speed– Press + to increase the fan speed and – to decrease fan
speed.
Dual– Press to activate/deactivate separate driver and passenger
temperature controls.
90
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
Max A/C– Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press MAX A/C again for
normal operation.
Rear Zone Power– Press to activate/deactivate the rear climate system.
Auto– Press to activate auto for the rear climate system. The system will
automatically determine fan speed and airflow direction in order to reach
and maintain the desired temperature.
Rear Zone– Press to activate the touchscreen controls for the rear
climate system.
Rear Control– Press to allow the rear passengers to control the rear
climate system using the rear mounted controls.
Temperature– Press up/down to increase/decrease the rear climate
temperature.
Fan Speed– Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.
VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIMATE MODE
Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the
Navigation system supplement for more information on using voice
commands with the climate control system.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
91
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C): In AUTO mode, press
AUTO control and set to desired temperature.
In manual override mode, select
or
, A/C and recirculated
air
and set the temperature to 60°F (16°C). Set the fan to the
highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain passenger comfort.
To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open for
2–3 minutes after starting the vehicle or until the vehicle has “aired out.”
In extremely cold temperatures, to maximize overall heater performance
it is suggested to not operate the auxiliary system (if equipped) until the
engine temperature gauge crosses into the normal operating range.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Press A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan to the highest speed.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL
1.
Fan control: Turn to select the desired fan speed or choose the
following.
92
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
• O Off: Select to shut the rear climate system off
• AUTO: Select to activate automatic control of the fan speed. The
system will automatically determine fan speed in order to reach and
maintain the desired temperature.
2.
Rear driver side heated seat control (if equipped): Press to
activate. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
3. Mode selector: Press repeatedly to select airflow as follows:
•
•
•
Vent: Directs air to the overhead vents of the second and third
row seating areas. The left light will be illuminated.
Floor: Directs air to the floor of the second or third row seating
areas. The right light will be illuminated.
Vent and Floor: Distributes air to the floor and overhead
vents of the second and third row seating areas. Both lights will be
illuminated.
4.
Rear passenger side heated seat control (if equipped): Press
to activate. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
5. Temperature selection: Turn to increase/decrease the air
temperature in the rear of the vehicle.
6.
Rear passenger side cooled seat control (if equipped): Press
to activate. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
7. AUTO
: Press to activate automatic control of the airflow direction
in the rear of the vehicle. The system will automatically determine the
airflow distribution in order to reach and maintain the desired
temperature.
8. REAR LOCK: Illuminates when the rear (auxiliary) climate system is
being controlled by the front controls. The rear (auxiliary) climate
controls will not work when this is illuminated.
9.
Rear driver side cooled seat control (if equipped): Press to
activate. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
93
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
R
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice.
The ignition must be on to operate the rear window defroster.
The rear defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the
ignition is turned off. To manually turn off the defroster before
10 minutes have passed, press the control again.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
CABIN AIR FILTER
The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of
airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the air being
supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The presence of a particulate filter
element provides the following benefits:
• Improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration.
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness.
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits.
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
The access door for the filter is located behind the glove box. For
replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter, see the scheduled
maintenance information. For more information regarding your filter,
see your authorized dealer.
94
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
A
Turns the low beam headlamps
on.
Adaptive headlamps
The headlamp beams move in the same direction as the steering wheel
which provides more visibility when driving around curves.
• Without adaptive headlamps (1)
• With adaptive headlamps (2)
Note: The system has a power-up
movement check feature. When the
vehicle is started, the lamps track
left to right, then back to center to
alert the driver that the system is
working properly. There is a delay of
two to five seconds before the
adaptive headlamp system will
operate when the vehicle is driven,
as the system is inactive below
3 mph (5 km/h).
95
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on/off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
A
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the
control clockwise to
.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the
control counterclockwise to
.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for a predetermined
amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off. You can change
the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming
procedure that follows:
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps it will have the
headlamps on with windshield wipers feature. If the windshield wipers
are turned on for a brief period of time, the exterior lamps will turn on
with the headlamp control in the Autolamp position.
Autolamps - Programmable exit delay
Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to
be changed.
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:
1. Start with the ignition in the off position and the headlamp control in
the autolamp position.
2. Turn the headlamp control to off.
3. Turn the ignition switch to on and then back to off.
4. Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position. The headlamps
will turn on.
5. Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want (up to
three minutes), then turn the headlamps off.
96
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Fog lamp control
With the ignition on, the fog lamps
can be turned on when the
headlamp control is pulled toward
you and is in any of the following
positions:
• Parking lamps
• Low beams
• Autolamps (when active)
The fog lamp indicator light will
illuminate when the fog lamps have been turned on. The fog lamps will
not operate when the high beams are active.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
2
Auto high beams
During nighttime driving, the automatic high beam system automatically
turns on your high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is
present. When it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlights or a
preceding vehicle’s tail lamps, the system turns off the high beams (low
beams remain on) before they distract other drivers.
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic high beams, the high beam
switch will operate differently depending on the status of the automatic
high beam system. Each of the possible operating scenarios are detailed
below:
Scenario 1:
Conditions - The automatic high beam system is set to ON in the
message center. The headlamp switch is in
(auto lamps). The
automatic high beam system has turned the high beams on.
Operation - The high beam switch will not perform any function.
97
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Scenario 2:
Conditions - The automatic high beam system is set to ON in the
message center. The headlamp switch is in
(auto lamps). The
automatic high beam system has not turned the high beams on.
Operation - The high beam switch can be used to turn the high beams
on. They will then remain on until the switch has been returned to the
neutral position and the auto high beam system has turned the high
beams off.
Scenario 3:
Conditions - The automatic high beam system is set to ON in the
message center. The headlamp switch is in
or (on).
(off),
(park lamps),
Operation - The high beam switch can be used to turn the high beams
on and off.
Scenario 4:
Conditions - The automatic high beam system is set to OFF in the
message center. The headlamp switch is in
(auto
lamps), (off), (park lamps), or
(on).
Operation - The high beam switch can be used to turn the high beams
on and off.
Enabling/disabling auto high beams
Enabling/disabling and/or checking the status of the automatic high beam
system can be performed using the message center. See Message center
in the Instrument cluster chapter.
Activating high beams
If there is no traffic in front of the vehicle, the high beams will come on
automatically and the
the following are true:
light will display in the instrument panel if
• The headlamp control is in auto lamp
mode.
• Fog lamps are turned off.
• The ambient light level is low enough that high beams are needed.
• Vehicle speed must be greater than 32 mph (51 km/h).
• Severe weather is not detected.
98
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Deactivating high beams
The automatic high beams will deactivate if any of the following events
occur:
• An approaching vehicle’s headlights or a preceding vehicle’s tail lamps
are detected.
• The headlamp control is moved out of the autolamps position.
• The vehicle speed falls below 27 mph (43 km/h).
• The ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not
needed.
• Severe rain, snow or fog is detected.
• The camera is blocked.
Note: Activating the multi-function lever will put the headlamps in
manual high beam mode (constant or flash-to-pass) until the lever is
returned to the neutral position. To manually override the auto high
beam and go to low beam, the headlamp control must be taken out of
the
(autolamp) position. For severe fog on freeways, or severe fog
in low traffic situations, use of fog lamps is recommended.
Setting auto high beam sensitivity
The automatic high beam system has two sensitivity settings. The default
setting is near. If you would like the high beams to turn off when traffic
is further away, the sensitivity setting can be changed to far. The
procedure is as follows:
Preconditions:
• Vehicle is at a stop.
• Ignition is in the on position.
• The headlamp control is in the
• High-beams are off.
position.
Programming Sequence:
1. Turn the headlamp control from
times within two seconds, ending in
(on) to
(on).
(autolamp) three
2. Cycle flash-to-pass three times using the multi-function lever.
3. The high beams will flash momentarily to confirm that the sensitivity
setting has been changed.
99
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Note: The programming sequence will end if either of the following occur:
• The vehicle speed is not zero.
• The battery voltage is out of normal range.
Troubleshooting
If the automatic high beam camera becomes blocked, the high beams
may not come on automatically. They will only activate when they are
manually turned on with the multi-function lever.
Typical road dust, dirt and water spots will not affect the automatic high
beam system’s performance. However, in cold or inclement weather
conditions, the automatic high beam system’s availability may be
decreased. In such conditions, the manual override may be used to turn
the high beams on or off.
For significant blockages (e.g. bird dropping, bug splatter, snow, or ice),
the automatic high beam system uses a blocked sensor computer
program. If a blockage is detected and no changes are observed, the
system will go into low beam mode until the blockage is cleared. If
blockages are repeatedly detected, the system will stay in low beam
mode for the remainder of the ignition cycle unless the system is able to
begin detecting other vehicles again.
If it appears that automatic control of the high beams is not functioning
properly, check the windshield in front of the camera for blockage.
Flash-to-pass
Pull and release to activate.
2
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the front fog lamps on.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the on position,
• the headlamp control is in the off, autolamps or parking lamp position
and
• the transmission must be out of the P (Park) position.
100
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
Tap the top of the switch to the first
detent to brighten all interior lighted
components. Tap the bottom of the
switch to the first detent to dim all
interior lighted components. Press
and hold the switch until the
desired lighting level is reached.
Press and hold the top of the switch to the second detent to activate the
interior courtesy lights. The lights will remain on until bottom of the
switch is pressed and held at the second detent.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Press the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full on position to reset. This will
ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
101
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height of the
headlamp projector (cross hair mark
on inner lens) center from the
ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape
works well).
3. Turn on the headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the
hood.
To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the
light from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam
will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the
horizontal reference line.
102
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
The horizontal edge of the brighter
light should touch the horizontal
reference line. Close the hood and
turn off the lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NON-ADJUSTABLE.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
2
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome lamps and map lamps
The map lamps are located on the
overhead console. Press the lens up
on either side of each map lamp to
turn on the lamps.
103
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Your vehicle has second row lamps
located within the grab handles.
Press the lens up to turn on the
lamps.
Cargo lamp
The cargo lamp has a switch with
three positions: on, off and center.
With the switch in the on position, the lamp will stay on all the time. In
the off position, the lamp will stay off even when the doors are opened.
With the switch in the center position, the lamp will turn on when the
doors are opened and the top of the panel dimmer control is pressed to
the full on position.
Ambient lighting
Illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of several colors. The
ambient lighting control is located
on the instrument panel. To
activate, press and release this
control to cycle through the color
choices plus the off state.
104
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Press this control to adjust color
intensity.
The lights come on whenever the ignition is in either on or in the
accessory position and the parklamps or headlamps are on.
Note: The ambient lights will stay on until the ignition is placed in the
off position and either of the front doors are opened or the accessory
delay timer expires.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
105
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Trade
Function
Number of bulbs
number
PY24W SV+
LED
LED
D3S HID
*Front turn lamp
*Front sidemarker lamp
*Front park lamp
*Headlamp
2
N/A
N/A
2
*Tail/brake/turn signal
lamp
N/A
LED
*Rear sidemarker
*Backup lamp
N/A
N/A
2
N/A
2
LED
LED
C5WL
LED
H11
License plate lamp
*High-mount brake lamp
Fog lamp (if equipped)
*First row dome/map lamp
*Second row dome/map
lamps
2
W5W
2
W5W
*Third row cargo lamp
Visor vanity lamp
1
2
211-2XB
37
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
*To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
Replacing interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing HID headlamp bulbs (if equipped)
The headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge” source.
These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned out, the
bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized
dealer.
106
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Replacing rear stop/tail/turn/backup and side marker lamps
Your vehicle is equipped with stop/tail/turn/backup and side marker lamp
assemblies containing integral multiple light emitting diodes (LED). If
replacement is required, see your authorized dealer.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position.
2. Remove the two screws from the
license plate lamp assembly and pull
it down.
3. Carefully pull the bulb out from
the contacts.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the fog lamp switch is
in the off position.
2. From underneath the vehicle,
partially remove the tire splash
shield by removing four drive
screws.
After removing to allow free access
to the front fog lamp bulb and
electrical wire harness, the splash shield flap should be able to be
repositioned.
3. Rotate the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise, to remove from
the fog lamp.
4. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly by
releasing the two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
107
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
2
Rain sensing wipers: The rain
sensing wipers will automatically
activate when moisture is present
on the windshield and the multi-function switch is set to one of five
auto/interval moisture sensitivity settings. Rotate the end of the control
toward the windshield to increase the sensitivity. The speed of the rain
sensitive wipers will vary based on the amount of moisture detected on
the windshield and the auto/interval setting. There are no interval
(intermittent wipe) settings on vehicles with rain sensing wipers. The
wipers will continue to wipe as long as the presence of moisture is
detected on the windshield. More or less wiping may occur depending on
humidity, mist or light rain, or road spray.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean, especially the area around the
rear view mirror where the sensor is located or rain sensor performance
may be affected.
Note: During winter driving conditions with ice, snow or a salty road
mist, inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing may occur. In these
conditions, you can lower the sensitivity to reduce the amount of
smearing or override the feature by selecting low- or high-speed wiping
or turning the wiper system off.
Note: The rain sensing wiper feature must be turned off before entering
a car wash.
Windshield washer: Press the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick press and hold: the
wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid.
• a long press and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield.
108
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Windshield wiper rainlamp feature (if equipped with Autolamp)
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
2
Select:
2 — Normal speed operation of rear
wiper.
1 — Intermittent operation of rear
wiper.
0 (off) — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
control to either
position.
From either position, the control will automatically return to the 2 or 0
(off) position.
Rear heated wiper blades: The wiper blades are heated automatically
to reduce ice buildup and activates when the vehicle is started. The
wiper rests are designed to operate regardless of the geographic location
of the vehicle.
109
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
POWER TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING COLUMN
The steering column can be
adjusted manually by moving the
four-way rocker adjustment control
located below the turn signal/wiper
control stalk. Hold the control to
adjust.
The telescope function is adjusted
by moving the control toward the
driver to telescope out, and toward
the instrument panel to telescope
in.
The tilt function is adjusted by moving the control up or down.
During easy exit, when you remove the key, the column will move to the
full in and up position. When the key is inserted into the ignition, the
column will return to the previous setting.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.
Slide-on-rod feature
The visor will slide back and forth
on the rod for increased sunlight
coverage. Rotate the visor towards
the side window and extend it
rearward for additional sunlight
coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.
110
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Storage compartment
The storage compartment may be
used to store a pair of sunglasses.
Press the release area on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
storage compartment. The door will
open to the full open position.
ELECTRONIC COMPASS
The compass heading is displayed in the touch screen.
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
2. Utility compartment with coin
holder, audio input jack, USB port
and power point
3. Rear climate controls, rear power
point outlet and 110 Volt power
point outlet (if equipped).
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
111
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Second row center console features (if equipped)
The second row center console
incorporates the following features:
• Flip forward armrest to provide a
flat load floor
• Utility compartment
• Cupholders
• Refrigerator unit (if equipped) in
the utility compartment. Refer to
Console refrigerator/freezer.
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Console refrigerator/freezer (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a refrigerator/freezer for keeping
items cool/frozen.
The refrigerator/freezer will operate when the vehicle is on or the
ignition is in the accessory mode. Ford recommends only using the
refrigerator/freezer when the vehicle’s engine is running.
If there is a need to use the refrigerator/freezer when the engine is off,
turn the ignition to the accessory mode and limit the time the
refrigerator is running to avoid draining the vehicle’s battery.
To open the refrigerator/freezer, flip
the console lid forward and then lift
off the refrigerator/freezer cover. Be
sure to replace the cover after you
are done using the
refrigerator/freezer. This will help it
maintain a more consistent cooling
temperature.
112
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Refrigerator: Briefly press and
hold the COOL side of the
control.The indicator light on the
cool side of the switch will
illuminate and the indicator light on
the freeze side will glow when the
refrigerator is active. When in cool
mode the temperature will cool to
approximately 41°F (5°C). Briefly
press and hold COOL again to turn
off the refrigerator or briefly press
and hold FREEZE to switch over to
freezer mode.
FREEZE
COOL
Freezer: Briefly press and hold the
FREEZE side of the control and
both indicator lights will illuminate
when the freezer is active. When in
freeze mode the temperature will
cool to approximately 23°F (-5°C).
Press FREEZE again to turn off the
freezer or press COOL to switch
over to refrigerator mode.
When the vehicle is turned off, the refrigerator/freezer will also turn off
and will turn back on to the last used mode (freeze or cool) once the
vehicle is restarted.
Cleaning and maintenance
The refrigerator/freezer is maintenance free, but you can clean the inside
of the unit and the cover with a mild soap and water solution when
needed.
Note: Under certain conditions, condensation on the inside walls of the
refrigerator is normal.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:
• Near the floor in the front console bin on the driver’s side
113
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• In the center console utility compartment
• On the rear of the center console (inside the second row center
console on vehicles equipped with that feature)
• In the rear cargo area on the driver’s side trim panel
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Power point (110 VAC) (if equipped)
The 110 VAC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices
that require up to 150W. Exceeding the 150W limit will cause the power
point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection.
Note: The 110 VAC power point is
equipped with a safety cap and a
safety twist tab. They both provide
AC 110V
150W
protection from inserting any object
into the power point other than the
110 VAC electrical device plug. The
safety cap should always be in a
closed position whenever the power
point outlet is not in use.
The 110 VAC power point is located on the back of the center console
(inside the second row center console on vehicles equipped with that
feature).
114
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances;
they may not work properly:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
• Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power
point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 VAC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design provided by the cap and twist tab. Doing so
my cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple
devices that can reach beyond the 150W load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,
overheated, or shorted. For overloading and shorting conditions, unplug
your device and turn the ignition key off then on. For an overheating
condition, let the system cool off, then turn the ignition key off then on.
The 110 VAC power point can provide power whenever the vehicle
ignition is in the run position and the power point green indicator light
located in the top left corner is turned on. Refer to the indicator light
code below for the power point status.
Indicator light Code
Green light is On — Power point is ready to supply power
Green light is Off — Power point power supply is off. Ignition is not in
RUN position
Green light is blinking — Power point is in fault mode
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
115
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press and pull the switches to open
and close windows.
• Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.
Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to
three inches.
Express-down (One-touch down, all windows)
Allows the windows to open fully
without holding the control down.
Press the switch completely down to
the second detent and release
quickly. The window will open fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any
position to stop the window
operation.
AUTO
AUTO
Express-up (One-touch up, all windows)
Allows the windows to close fully
without holding the control up. Pull
the switch completely up to the
second detent and release quickly.
The window will close fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any
position to stop the window
operation.
Global open windows
You can open the vehicle’s windows by using the
remote transmitter.
control on the
116
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Press and hold the
control on the transmitter to begin to open the
windows. For the transmitter, pressing either the
the transmitter will stop all motion.
or
control on
Note: The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not
be activated in order for this feature to operate.
Note: This feature can be disabled or enabled by your authorized dealer.
Global close windows
You can close the vehicle’s windows by using the
remote transmitter.
control on the
Press and hold the
control on the transmitter to close the windows.
Note: The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not
be activated in order for this feature to operate.
Note: This feature can be disabled or enabled by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: To avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, verify
that windows are free of obstructions before operating and
ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity of window
openings.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s) press the
right side of the control. Press the
left side to restore the window
controls.
Bounce-back
When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the
window is moving upward, the window will automatically reverse
direction and move down. This is known as “bounce-back”. If the ignition
is turned off (without accessory delay being active) during bounce-back,
the window will move down until the bounce-back position is reached.
117
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Security override
To override a bounce-back condition, within two seconds after the
window reaches the bounce-back position, pull and hold the switch up
and the window will travel up with no bounce-back or pinch
protection. If the switch is released before the window is fully closed,
the window will stop. For example, this can be used to overcome the
resistance of ice on the window or seals.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the radio, power windows, and moon roof (if
equipped) operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned from on to off or until one of the front doors are opened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror
Your vehicle is equipped with an interior rear view mirror which has an
auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from
the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare (darkened) state
when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. When the mirror detects
bright light from behind the vehicle, it will automatically adjust (darken)
to minimize glare.
The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
118
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power side view mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Memory mirrors (if equipped)
The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory
set and can be recalled using the memory feature. Refer to Seats in the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
Automatic dimming feature
The driver’s side view mirror has an auto-dimming function. For more
information, refer to Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror in
this chapter.
Heated outside mirrors
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space,
like an automatic car wash.
119
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Signal indicator mirrors
When the turn signal is activated,
the outer portion of the appropriate
mirror housing will blink.
This provides an additional warning
to other drivers that your vehicle is
about to turn.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control
(located on the instrument panel) to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal.
• Press the top of the control to
adjust the pedals away from you.
• Press the bottom of the control to adjust the pedals towards you.
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
Memory feature (if equipped)
The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved when doing a
memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle
personality features when a memory position is selected through the
remote entry transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the
driver’s door (if equipped with memory feature). Refer to Seats in the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
SPEED CONTROL
With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
120
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Using speed control
The speed controls are located on the steering wheel. The following
buttons work with speed control:
RESUME: Press to resume a set
speed.
SET +: Press to increase the set
speed.
SET – : Press to decrease the set
speed.
OFF/ON: Press to turn speed
control off or on.
Setting speed control
To set speed control:
1. Press and release ON.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET + or SET -.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5. The indicator
light on the instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
Press the brake pedal to disengage the speed control. Disengaging the
speed control will not erase the previous set speed.
Resuming a set speed
Press and release RESUME. This will automatically return the vehicle to
the previously set speed.
121
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Increasing speed while using speed control
To set a higher speed:
• Press and hold SET + until you get to the desired speed, then release.
You can also use SET + to operate the tap-up function. Press and
release SET + to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
increments.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and
release SET +.
Reducing speed while using speed control
To reduce a set speed:
• Press and hold SET – until you get to the desired speed, then release.
You can also use SET – to operate the tap-down function. Press and
release SET – to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
increments.
• Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then
press SET –.
Turning off speed control
To turn off the speed control, Press OFF or turn off the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) (IF EQUIPPED)
Adaptive cruise control is much like speed control, only this system is
designed to automatically adjust your speed to maintain a proper
distance between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
The driver can select from one of three GAP settings, the controls are
located on the steering wheel.
At startup, the system sets the gap
to the last selected setting. Once
activated, the driver can deactivate
the system at any time by either
pressing the brake pedal or pressing
the steering wheel ON/OFF control. In addition, the driver can
temporarily increase the vehicle speed above the current speed by
manually pressing on the accelerator pedal.
122
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
WARNING: Always pay close attention to changing road
conditions, especially when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
Adaptive Cruise Control cannot replace attentive driving. Failing to
follow any of the warnings below or failing to pay attention to the road
may result in a collision, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or
avoidance system. Additionally, adaptive cruise control will not
detect:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive cruise control when
entering or leaving a highway, in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
WARNING: Do not use in poor visibility, specifically fog, rain,
spray or snow.
Setting adaptive cruise control
Note: It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
The controls for using your cruise
control are located on the steering
wheel.
1. Press and release the ON control.
The message center will display
CRUISE ON RADAR READY.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
123
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
3. Press and release the SET +
control. The vehicle speed will be
stored in the memory and the
message center will display SET
XXX MPH (your desired speed).
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The green
cruise indicator
light on the instrument cluster will
illuminate if there are no vehicles
detected in front of you, while the yellow
ACC indicator light on the
instrument cluster will illuminate if there is a vehicle detected in front of
you.
Following a vehicle
WARNING: When following a vehicle in front of you, the vehicle
will not decelerate automatically to a stop, nor will the vehicle
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so
may result in a collision, serious injury or death.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is
ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed will adjust automatically to
maintain a preset gap distance. The distance setting is adjustable, refer
to Setting the gap distance in this section.
The yellow
ACC indicator light
in the instrument cluster will be
illuminated and the message center
will temporarily display a preset
GAP <--->.
The vehicle will maintain a constant distance between the vehicle ahead
until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view.
• The vehicle speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h).
• A new gap distance is set.
The vehicle brakes will be automatically applied to slow the vehicle to
maintain a safe distance between the vehicle in front. The maximum
124
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
braking which is applied by the ACC system is limited and can be
overridden by the driver applying the brakes.
If the ACC system predicts that its
maximum braking level will not be
sufficient, an audible warning will
sound while the ACC continues to
brake. This is accompanied by a red
warning bar appearing in the
windshield. The driver should take immediate action.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by
the adaptive cruise control system.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no
warning or the warning may be delayed. The driver should always
apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
collision, serious injury or death.
Setting the gap distance
The distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you can
be decreased or increased by
pressing <---> control. GAP <--->
will be displayed in the message
center. Three gap distance settings
are available:
Message
Center Display
Following
distance
Following
distance at
60 mph
Dynamic
behavior
(96 km/h)
GAP <->
GAP <--->
GAP <----->
1 second
1.5 seconds
2.3 seconds
29 yards (26 m) Sporty
44 yards (40 m) Normal
66 yards (60 m) Comfort
Each time the vehicle is restarted, the last chosen gap will be
automatically selected.
125
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the
driving conditions.
Disengaging adaptive cruise control
Press the brake pedal to disengage the adaptive cruise control. CRUISE
CANCELLED will be displayed in the message center.
Disengaging the adaptive cruise control will not erase your previous set
speed.
Overriding adaptive cruise control
WARNING: Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by
pressing the accelerator pedal, the ACC will not automatically
apply the brakes to maintain separation from any vehicle ahead.
The set speed and gap distance can be overridden by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
When the driver is overriding ACC, the green
cruise indicator light
is illuminated, and CRUISE OVERRIDE is displayed in the message
center. When the accelerator is released, the ACC function will operate
again and vehicle speed will decrease to the set speed, or a lower speed
if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the set speed
There are three ways to change the
set speed:
• Accelerate or brake to the
desired speed and press and
release the SET + or SET –
control
• Increase or decrease the speed by
holding either the SET + or SET
– control, until the desired set
speed is shown on the message
center. The vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed.
• Increase or decrease the speed in increments of 1 mph (2 km/h) by
briefly pressing the SET + or SET – control.
The ACC may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle down to the new set
speed. The set speed will display continuously in the message center
while ACC is active.
126
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Resuming the set speed
Press and release the RESUME
control. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The set speed will display
continuously in the message center
while ACC is active.
Note: RESUME should only be used
if the driver is aware of the set
speed and intends to return to it.
Low speed automatic cancellation
ACC is not functional at vehicle speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h). Once
the vehicle speed drops below 18 mph (30 km/h), an audible alarm will
sound, the head’s up display will flash and the automatic braking will be
released.
Hilly condition usage
It is recommended that the driver select a lower gear position when ACC
is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades
(i.e., driving in mountainous areas). In these situations, additional engine
braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake
system to prevent them from overheating. For more information,
reference Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
Note: If ACC is applying brakes for an extended period of time, an
audible alarm will sound, the head’s up display will flash and ACC will
shut down. This is to allow the brakes to cool down. When the brakes
have cooled down, the ACC will again function normally.
127
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Turning off cruise control
Press the OFF button to turn off the
cruise control.
Note: When you turn off the cruise
control or the ignition, your cruise
control set speed memory is erased.
Detection issues
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may
not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected.
Detection issues can occur:
• When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front.
• With vehicles that edge into your lane. These vehicles can only be
detected once they have moved fully into your lane.
128
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road.
In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver should
stay alert and intervene when necessary.
ACC Not Available
Several conditions exist which can cause ACC to deactivate or prevent
ACC from activating when requested. These conditions include:
• The sensor is blocked, refer to Blocked sensor in this section.
• Brake temperature is high, refer to Hilly condition usage in this
section.
• A failure has occurred in the ACC system or related system.
Blocked sensor
If a message regarding a blocked
sensor is displayed, the radar signals
from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the driver
side of the lower grille. When the
radar signals are obstructed, a
vehicle ahead cannot be detected
and the ACC will not function. The
following table lists possible causes
and actions for this message being displayed.
129
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Cause
Action
The surface of the radar in the
grille is dirty or obstructed in
some way
The surface of the radar in the
grille is clean but the message
remains in the display
Clean the grille surface in front of
the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
Wait a short time. It may take
several minutes for the radar to
detect that it is no longer
obstructed
Heavy rain or snow is interfering
with the radar signals
Do not use ACC in these
conditions because it may not
detect, warn, or respond to
potential collisions.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on
the surface of the road may
interfere with the radar signals
Do not use ACC in these
conditions because it may not
detect, warn, or respond to
potential collisions.
WARNING: Do not use ACC when towing a trailer with brake
controls. Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function properly
when ACC is activated because the brakes are electronically controlled.
Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use tires sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect the normal operation of
ACC. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
130
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Radio control features
– VOL + (Volume): Press to
decrease or increase the volume.
(Seek): Press to select
the previous/next radio station
preset, CD track or satellite radio
station preset depending on which
media mode you are in.
MEDIA: Press repeatedly to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2 or CD
• SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 (Satellite radio mode)
• LINE IN (Auxiliary input jack)
SYNC system hands free
control feature
Press
briefly to use the voice
command feature. You will hear a
tone and LISTENING will appear in
the radio display. Press and
hold
to exit voice command.
Press
to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and
hold
to end call or exit phone
mode.
For further information on the SYNC system, refer to the SYNC
supplement.
131
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Navigation system/SYNC hands
free control features (if
equipped)
Press
voice
control briefly until the
icon appears on the
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
Press
to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and
hold
call.
to exit phone mode or end
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC system, refer to
the Navigation System and SYNC supplements.
POWER PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF™ (IF EQUIPPED) AND POWER
SUNSHADES
The panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade controls are located on
the overhead console.
WARNING: Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista
Roof™ and power sunshade or leave children unattended in the
vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.
WARNING: When closing the panoramic Vista Roof™ and
power sunshade, you should verify that it is free of obstructions
and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the
panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade opening.
Note: Do not attempt to move the panoramic power sunshades manually
or sunshade damage or malfunction may occur. The sunshade track clips
are designed to release the sunshade crossbar in order to prevent
damage to the system. If this occurs the sunshade crossbar ends may
just need to be slid back into position to regain proper function. See
your authorized dealer for proper panoramic Vista Roof™ or sunshade
operating, diagnostic or repair instructions.
Note: The same
control operates both the sunshades and the
panoramic Vista Roof™. If the vehicle has a fixed glass roof, there will
only be the
132
control in the center position.
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
The panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshade are equipped with an
automatic, one-touch, express opening feature. To stop motion at any
time during the one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
To open power sunshades and
panoramic Vista Roof™: Press
and release the
control to
open the sunshade. The front and
rear sunshades open simultaneously.
TILT
Note: Vista Roof™ will only open
after power sunshades are
completely open. Power sunshades
will only close after Vista Roof™ is
completely closed.
To open the panoramic Vista Roof™ press and release the
control.
The panoramic Vista Roof™ will open to the “comfort” position. Press
and release the control again to fully open. To stop the one-touch open
feature press the control again.
Note: The “comfort” position helps to alleviate rumbling wind noise
which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened.
To close the panoramic Vista Roof™ and power sunshades: Pull
the
control down and release until the glass panel stops at the
“express close” position. Firmly pull and hold the control again to fully
close the Vista Roof™. Pull the control down again and release to close
the sunshades at the “express close” position. Firmly pull and hold the
control again to fully close the front and rear sunshades.
To vent the panoramic Vista
Roof™: From the closed position,
press and release the TILT control.
To close, pull and hold the TILT
TILT
control down.
Note: If the panoramic Vista Roof™
is excessively operated, the glass
and shade motors will automatically
go into a fail-safe jog mode (manual
intermittent operation) to prevent
overheating and/or damage to the
motor. The motors will revert back to normal operation after a period of
idle time.
133
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of your vehicle’s universal garage door opener will vary
according to your option package. Before programing, make sure your
transmitter matches the graphic in the procedure.
HomeLink
Car2U Home Automation
System
HomeLinkா Wireless Control System (if equipped)
The HomeLink Wireless Control
System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This feature will learn the
radio frequency codes of most
transmitters to operate garage
doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and
home or office lighting.
WARNING: When programming your HomeLink Wireless
Control System to a garage door or gate, be sure that people and
objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
134
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
accessory position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink.
It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches
(2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program (located
on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the chosen HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Note: Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to
replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents.
3. Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the
door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a constant light continue with “Programming” Steps 4 through
6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
135
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the
press/hold/release sequence again and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in this section.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at
www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing Step 1 outlined in
the Programming section, replace
Step 2 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note Step 2 in the
Programming section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section.
136
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Operating the HomeLinkா Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Erasing HomeLinkா buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be
programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming
section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
137
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Car2Uா Home Automation System (if equipped)
The Car2U Home Automation
System is a universal transmitter
located in the driver’s visor that
includes two primary features – a
garage door opener and a platform
for remote activation of devices
within the home. The Car2U
system’s garage door opener
function replaces the common
hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the interior of your vehicle. After being programmed for
garage doors, the Car2U system transmitter can be programmed to
operate security devices and home lighting systems.
WARNING: Make sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are programming. Do not
program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the Car2U system with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before
April 1, 1982).
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Car2U system programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle, the
programmed Car2U system buttons should be erased for security
reasons. Refer to Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System
buttons later in this section.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the
Car2U system. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have
another person assist you in programming the transmitter.
Additional Car2U system information can be found on-line at
www.learcar2U.com or by calling the toll-free Car2U system help line at
1-866-572-2728.
Types of garage door openers (rolling code and fixed code)
The Car2U Home Automation System may be programmed to operate
rolling code and fixed code garage door openers.
• Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every
time your remote control garage door opener is used.
138
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996. Fixed
code uses the same coded signal every time. It is manually
programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code.
If you do not know if your garage
door opener is a rolling code or
O
N
1
2
4
5
9
11
12
10
3
6
7
8
fixed code device, open your garage
door opener’s remote control battery
cover. If a panel of DIP switches is
present your garage door opener is
a fixed code device. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code
device.
CTS 206-12
T
124
Rolling code programming
Note: Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions. Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so
you will know which actions are time-sensitive. If you do not follow the
time-sensitive actions, the device will time out and you will have to
repeat the procedure.
Note: Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.
1. Firmly press the two outer
Car2U system buttons for
1–2 seconds, then release.
139
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
2. Go to the garage to locate the
garage door opener motor and its
“learn” button. You may need a
ladder to reach the unit and you
may need to remove the unit’s cover
or light lens to locate the “learn”
button. Press the “learn” button,
after which you will have
10–30 seconds to return to your
vehicle and complete the following
steps. If you cannot locate the
“learn” button, refer to the Owner’s Guide of your garage door opener or
call the toll-free Car2U system help line at 1-866-57Car2U
(1-866-572-2728).
3. Return to your vehicle. Press and
hold the Car2U system button you
would like to use to control the
garage door. You may need to hold
the button from 5–20 seconds,
during which time the selected
button indicator light will blink
slowly. Immediately (within
1 second) release the button once the garage door moves. When the
button is released, the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until
programming is complete.
4. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps in this section.
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door
opener, a security device or home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 4
substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for
the garage door opener. For example, you could assign the left-most
button to the garage door, the center button to a security device, and
the right-most button to another garage door opener.
140
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
Note: The Car2U system allows for three devices to be programmed. If
you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it is necessary to erase the current settings using
the Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons procedure
and then programming all of the devices being used.
Fixed code programming
Note: Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.
1. To program units with fixed code DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter, paper and a pen or pencil.
2. Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to
right for all 8 to 12 switches. Use the figure below:
When a switch is in the up, on, or + position, circle “L.”
When a switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, circle “M.”
When a switch is in the down, off, or – position, circle “R.”
Switch position
Up, on or +
1
L
2
L
3
L
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
8
L
9
L
10 11 12
L
M
R
L
M
R
L
M
R
Middle, neutral or 0
Down, off or –
M
R
M
R
M
R
M
R
M
R
M
R
M
R
M
R
M
R
L=left; M=middle; R=right
141
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
3. To input these positions into the
Car2U system, simultaneously
press all three Car2U system
buttons for a few seconds and then
release to put the device into
programming mode. The indicator
lights will blink slowly. Within
2.5 minutes enter your
corresponding DIP switch settings
from left to right into your Car2U system by pressing and releasing the
buttons corresponding to the settings you circled.
4. After inputting switch settings, simultaneously press and release all
three Car2U system buttons. The indicator lights will turn on.
5. Press and hold the Car2U
system button you would like to use
to control the garage door.
Immediately (within 1 second)
release the button once the garage
door moves. During this time the
selected button indicator light will
blink slowly. Do not release the
button until you see the garage door move. Most garage doors open
quickly. You may need to hold the button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage door.
6. The indicator light will (begin to) blink rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door opener does not operate following these
steps, repeat Steps 2 through 6. Otherwise, call the toll-free Car2U help
line at 1-866-57Car2U (1-866-572-2728).
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the Car2Uா Home Automation System buttons
Note: The system allows for three devices to be programmed. If you
need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it will be necessary to erase the current settings
using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices
being used.
142
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To erase programming on the Car2U system (individual buttons cannot
be erased), use the following procedure:
1. Firmly press the two outside
Car2U system buttons
simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
begin to blink rapidly. The indicator
lights are located directly above the
buttons.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to
blink, release your fingers from the
buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U system, it is
recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
The Car2U system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any interference received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Changes and modifications to the Car2U system transmitter by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the
equipment.
POWER LIFTGATE
You can power open or close the liftgate with the following controls:
• Instrument panel control button
• Remote entry transmitter button
• Outside liftgate control button
• Control button in the rear cargo area
Opening and Closing the power liftgate:
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power liftgate control.
143
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
WARNING: To avoid injury to third-row occupants when closing
the liftgate, ensure that the head of any occupant is not in the
path of the closing liftgate.
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach of children. Do not allow
children to play near an open or moving power liftgate.
The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P (Park).
When the liftgate is being power closed, a chime will sound three times
as the liftgate begins to power close. A single chime indicates a problem
with the close request, caused by:
• the ignition is on and the transmission is not in P (Park);
• or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage;
• or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request, a fast
continuous chime indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut
failure. If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster
chime, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the
power system will permit. This will activate the obstacle detection
feature.
Note: Cycling the ignition prior to completely latching the liftgate could
result in damage to the liftgate and/or its power components. Make sure
the liftgate is fully latched before operating the vehicle.
Care should be exercised in starting the engine before the liftgate is fully
closed (latched). If the ignition is cycled during a liftgate power close
cycle and the liftgate is 6-10 inches (15–24 cm) from being latched, the
liftgate may reverse to the full open position. Verify that the gate is
closed before operating or moving the vehicle, especially in an enclosure,
like a garage or a parking structure. The liftgate or it components could
be damaged in an enclosure, if the liftgate is open.
When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the
liftgate may stop about 5 inches (12.7 cm) from the full open position.
The liftgate can be fully opened by pushing it upward to the maximum
open position.
144
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
The power liftgate feature can be enabled or disabled using the message
center controls. With the setting turned off, power operation is disabled
from the liftgate handle button and from the rear cargo area button. The
integrated keyhead transmitter and instrument panel switch will still
continue to operate the liftgate regardless of the position state of the
message center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
To power open or close the
liftgate from the instrument
panel:
Press the button, located to the left
of the steering column, once to
power open or close the liftgate.
To power open or close the liftgate with the remote entry
transmitter:
Press
twice within three seconds to power open or close the liftgate.
Refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter.
To power open the liftgate with
outside liftgate control button:
1. Unlock the liftgate with the
remote entry transmitter or power
door unlock control.
2. Press the control button located
on the surface above the license
plate.
Note: For the best performance
allow the power system to open the
liftgate after pressing the control. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate
may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation.
145
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
To power close the liftgate with
the rear cargo area control
button:
Press and release the control on the
left rear quarter panel to close the
liftgate.
Note: The rear cargo area control
button is disabled when the liftgate
is latched.
WARNING: Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear
switch.
Note: The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second
press of the instrument panel, or the rear cargo area control button, or a
second double press of the remote entry transmitter button.
To manually operate the liftgate:
1. Disable the liftgate power function. Refer to the Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter.
2. Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate.
Note: In case of operation in extreme cold -40°F (-40°C), or on extreme
inclines, manual operation of the liftgate is suggested.
Obstacle detection:
The power liftgate system is equipped with an obstacle detection feature.
If the power liftgate is closing, the system will reverse to full open when
it detects an obstacle. A chime will sound three times when an obstacle
is detected as the liftgate begins to reopen. Once the obstacle is
removed, the liftgate can be closed under power.
If the power liftgate is opening, the system will stop and a chime will
sound three times when an obstacle is detected. Once the obstacle is
removed, the liftgate can again be operated normally.
Resetting the power liftgate:
The power liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if
any of these conditions occur:
• a low voltage or dead battery
• disconnected battery
146
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
• the liftgate is manually closed and left ajar (unlatched)
To reset the power liftgate:
1. Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then, reconnect the battery.
2. Manually close and fully latch the liftgate.
3. Power open the liftgate by using the remote entry transmitter, or the
instrument panel control button.
Note: If the power liftgate system is turned off in the message center,
the system cannot be activated with the outside release handle or rear
cargo area control button. The system will need to be turned on to
resume operation with the outside release handle or rear cargo area
control button. The power liftgate is still operational through the use of
the remote entry transmitter and instrument panel button when the
power liftgate is turned off in the message center.
WARNING: Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent
exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with
the liftgate door open, keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air
comes into the vehicle.
147
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo net (if equipped)
The cargo pouch net secures
lightweight objects in the cargo
area. Attach the net to the anchors
provided. Do not put more than
50 lb (22 kg) in the net.
WARNING: The cargo net
is not designed to restrain
objects during a collision or heavy
braking.
Cargo shade (if equipped)
If your vehicle has a cargo shade, you can use it to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
Note: Both of the third row outboard safety belts must be placed in the
stowage clips to prevent potential wrinkling of the cargo shade. Refer to
Safety restraints in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
To install the shade:
• Insert the ends of the cargo
shade into the mounting features
located behind the rear seat on
the rear trim panels.
To operate the shade:
1. Grasp the rear edge of the cargo
shade and pull rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support
rod into the retention slots located
on the rear quarter trim panels.
148
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Controls
WARNING: Ensure that the posts are properly latched in
mounting features. The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop
or accident if it is not securely installed.
WARNING: Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade.
They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of vehicle in
the case of a sudden stop or collision.
149
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle is equipped with two
Intelligent Access keys which
operate the power locks and the
remote entry system. The IA key
must be inside the vehicle in order
to activate the push button start
system.
The IA key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade
that can be used to unlock the
driver door. To release the
mechanical key blade, press the
release button on the back of the
transmitter and slide the blade out.
Your IA keys are programmed to
your vehicle. You cannot enter or
start your vehicle with an
unprogrammed key. If you lose one
or both of your IA keys,
replacements are available from
your authorized dealer. For more
information on programming
replacement IA keys, refer to the
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system section in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IA backup keys
were issued with a security tag that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you keep the tag in a safe place for
future reference.
MYKEY™
The MyKey™ feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated as a MyKey™. The key will remain restricted
until MyKey™ is disabled. Any remaining keys are referred to as an
150
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
“Administrator key” or Admin key. The Admin key can be used to create
a MyKey™, program optional MyKey™ settings, and disable the
MyKey™ feature. When the MyKey™ feature is enabled the user can use
System Check in the message center to see how many MyKeys™ and
Admin keys are programmed to the vehicle, and how many total miles
have been driven with the MyKey™ active.
MyKey™ Restricted Features
Standard settings – These settings cannot be changed
• The audio system will be muted whenever Belt-Minder is activated
until the safety belts are buckled. Refer to the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt-Minder
operation.
• Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a
chime when the Distance to Empty value reaches 75 miles (120 km).
• The Reverse sensing system, Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)
with Cross Traffic Alert and Collision Warning system cannot be
turned off.
Optional settings – These settings can be changed
• Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached
80 mph (130 km/h).
• Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected
vehicle speed of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) is exceeded
• The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45%. MYKEY
VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the radio or (if equipped)
navigation screen when attempting to exceed the limited volume
• The AdvanceTrac system cannot be turned off. When this optional
setting is on, the MyKey™ user will not be able to deactivate the
system. Note: It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac
system if the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand.
Create a MyKey™
To program MyKey™ on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle,
insert the key that you want to make a MyKey™ into the ignition. (For
vehicles equipped with push button start, put the Intelligent Access Key
in the backup slot; see the Driving chapter for the location of the
backup slot.) Turn the ignition on. Use the message center buttons to do
the following:
1. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
151
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
MYKEY will be displayed.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS
AS RESTRICTED is displayed.
4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed.
MyKey™ is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the Admin keys. Note: To program the optional
settings go to step 2 in the Programming MyKey™ Optional Settings
section. If your vehicle is equipped with remote start, see the Using
MyKey™ with Remote Start Systems section.
Note: The MyKey™ can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was
created, otherwise a standard key (Administrator key) is required to
disable the MyKey™ programming. To clear all MyKeys™ go to Step 2 in
the Disable MyKey™ section.
Programming MyKey™ Optional Settings
With an Admin key in the backup slot, turn the ignition on; To program
the optional settings, use the message center buttons to do the following:
1. Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey setup menus.
The first menu shown is:
MYKEY MAX MPH <80 MPH> OFF
3. If you don’t want to change the maximum speed setting, press the
SETUP button to display the next menu. The remaining menus appear as
follows with the default settings shown:
MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 <OFF>
MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT <ON> OFF
MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON <OFF>.
4. On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the
<…>.
5. Press SETUP to enter your choice. The next optional setting will be
displayed.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional settings.
Disable MyKey™
To reset all MyKeys™ as Admin keys do the following:
1. With an Admin key in the backup slot, turn the ignition on.
2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed.
152
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
3. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
CLEAR is displayed.
4. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS
CLEARED is displayed.
Check MyKey™ System Status
The vehicle System Check will provide the status of the following
MyKey™ parameters:
• MYKEY MILES — This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey™
is used. If mileage does not accumulate as expected, then the
MyKey™ is not being used by the intended user. The only way to
reset this odometer to zero is by disabling MyKey™. If this odometer
is lower than the last time you checked, then the MyKey™ system has
been recently cleared.
• # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many MyKeys™ are
programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect deletion of a
MyKey™.
• # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many Admin keys
are programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect if an additional
spare key has been programmed to the vehicle
Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey™
system warnings displays.
Using MyKey™ with Remote Start Systems
MyKey™ is not compatible with non-Ford approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system.
Intelligent Access Key (push button start)
• It is not possible to program the remote start system as MyKey™ on
vehicles equipped with Intelligent Access Key (push button start).
Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any
other admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the
system will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift
the vehicle into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have
administrative privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will
identify the user as an Admin or MyKey™ driver depending on the
settings of the actual key used to start the vehicle.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey™ System
Status menus will include the remote start system as an additional key in
the total count. See the Check MyKey™ System Status section.
153
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Note: For all vehicles with remote start installed, it is possible to
program all ’real’ keys as MyKeys™, in which case, you will need to use
your remote start system to reset all MyKeys™ as Admin keys by doing
the following:
1. Enter the vehicle, close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob.
3. Follow steps 1-4 in the Disable MyKey™ section.
Troubleshooting
Condition
Potential Causes
Can’t create a MyKey™
• Key in the backup slot is already a
MyKey™.
• Key in the backup slot is the last
remaining Admin key (there always has
to be at least one Admin key).
• Intelligent Access Key (if equipped)
not in the backup slot (for vehicles with
push button start).
•SecuriLock Passive Anti-Theft
System is disabled or in unlimited mode
• Vehicle has been started using a
remote start system that is programmed
as MyKey™. Refer to Using MyKey™
with Remote Start Systems section.
Cannot program the MyKey™ • Key in the backup slot is a MyKey™
optional settings
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Create a MyKey™
section
• Vehicle has been started using a
remote start system that is programmed
as MyKey™. Refer to Using MyKey™
with Remote Start Systems section.
154
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Condition
Potential Causes
Cannot disable MyKey™
• Key in the backup slot is a MyKey™
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Create a MyKey™
section
• Vehicle has been started using a
remote start system that is programmed
as MyKey™. Refer to Using MyKey™
with Remote Start Systems section.
Lost the only Admin key
Lost any key
• Purchase a new key from your
authorized dealer
• For programming spare keys, refer to
the Programming spare keys section
in this chapter.
I accidentally programmed all • Vehicle has a remote start system
keys as MyKeys™
that is recognized as an Admin key.
Refer to the Using MyKey™ with
Remote Start Systems section to reset
all MyKeys™ as Admin keys.
No MyKey™ function with
Intelligent Access Key (push start
• An Admin Key is present at vehicle
button start)
• No MyKeys™ are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Create a MyKey™
section
MyKey™ Programmed total
includes one additional key
• Unknown key has been programmed
to the vehicle as a MyKey™.
• Vehicle is equipped with a remote
start system. Refer to Using MyKey™
with Remote Start Systems section.
Admin Keys Programmed
total includes one additional to the vehicle as Admin key.
• Unknown key has been programmed
key
• Vehicle is equipped with a remote
start system. Refer to Using MyKey™
with Remote Start Systems section.
MyKey™ miles do not
accumulate
• MyKey™ is not being used by the
intended user.
• MyKey™ system has been recently
cleared.
155
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
POWER DOOR LOCKS
• Press the
control to unlock all
doors.
• Press the
control to lock all
doors.
Smart unlocks
The smart unlock feature is intended to prevent you from unintentionally
locking your IA key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment.
When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door
lock control (with the door open), after you close the door the vehicle
will search for an IA key in the passenger compartment. If an IA key is
found inside the vehicle, all of the doors will immediately unlock and the
horn will chirp, indicating that the IA key is inside.
In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the
IA key inside the vehicle, you can lock your vehicle using your keyless
entry keypad or using the
control on another IA key. Refer to Keyless
entry system in this chapter for more information on keyless entry
keypad operation.
Global open/close windows
You can open and close the vehicle’s windows by using the
and
controls on the transmitter. Refer to Power windows in the Driver
Controls chapter for more information.
Central locking/Two-stage unlocking
When unlocking the driver door with the key, turn it once toward the
rear of the vehicle to unlock that door only, if the two-stage unlocking is
enabled. Turn the key a second time to unlock all doors. When locking,
turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to lock all doors.
Two-stage unlocking may be disabled and re-enabled (to allow all vehicle
doors to unlock simultaneously) by simultaneously pressing
the
and
controls on the transmitter for four seconds.
Note: The turn lamps will flash twice to confirm that a change to the
feature has occurred.
156
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Autolock feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is on and the vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Deactivating/activating autolock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock procedure,
• using a keypad procedure, or
• by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is off and all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
5. Turn the ignition back on. The horn will chirp one time to confirm
programming mode has been entered and is active.
157
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Keyless entry keypad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While
holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user will receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and the vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned off or to
accessory; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
turned off or to accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
158
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated; there are four
methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
• using a keypad procedure, or
• by using the instrument cluster message center. Refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is off and all vehicle doors are closed.
You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, wait a
minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
5. Turn the ignition back on. The horn will chirp one time to confirm
programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
159
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While
holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 •
4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user will receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to
disengage the childproof locks.
160
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
The Intelligent Access keys (IA key) comply with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The transmitter allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle doors
• remotely lock all the vehicle doors
• remotely open the power liftgate
.
.
.
• activate the personal alarm
.
• arm and disarm the perimeter anti-theft system.
• operate the illuminated entry feature.
• activate the global opening windows feature.
Refer to Intelligent Access in this section for more features.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the vehicle is in the start position. The panic feature
operates with the ignition off.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL Intelligent Access keys with you to the authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
161
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Intelligent Access
WARNING: Radio waves from the Intelligent Access system
transmitters in the vehicle may affect certain implanted medical
devices such as pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators. People having
such implanted medical devices should ask the medical device
manufacturer or their physician whether the Intelligent Access system
may affect the equipment before coming into close proximity with a
vehicle equipped with Intelligent Access. Failure to do so may result in
interference with the medical device, which could result in serious
injury.
Your Intelligent Access system uses a radio frequency (RF) signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock
when commanded (either by pressing any keyless entry keypad button,
the power liftgate button, or a button on the transmitter itself). If
excessive RF interference is present in the area, or if your vehicle
battery is low, it may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door. The
mechanical key blade in your IA key can be used to open the driver’s
door in this situation (refer to Intelligent access key in this chapter for
more information on the location and use of the mechanical key blade).
Your vehicle will allow you to unlock and enter your vehicle without
actively using a key or transmitter. You can use the Intelligent Access
feature at the driver door or at the liftgate. You can activate the
Intelligent Access feature as long as you have one of your IA keys within
range of the driver door or the liftgate.
Activating Intelligent Access at the Driver’s Door: If your IA key is
within 3 feet (1 meter) of the drivers door, you can activate your
Intelligent Access system by pressing any button on the keyless entry
keypad. The drivers door will automatically unlock and the door can be
opened.
(Note: If two stage unlocking is disabled, all doors will unlock when you
press any button on the keyless entry keypad).
Activating Intelligent Access at the liftgate: If your IA key is within
3 feet (1 meter) of the liftgate, you can activate your Intelligent Access
system by pressing the exterior liftgate release button, hidden under the
trim above the license plate. The liftgate will release and open.
Push button start: The push button start system allows you to start
your vehicle without using a key. Refer to Push button start in the
Driving chapter.
162
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Unlocking the doors/two stage unlock
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door.
Note: The interior lamps and parking lamps will illuminate.
2. Press
doors.
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature; this
feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned
on.
The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned off.
Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re-enabled by simultaneously
pressing the
and
controls on the transmitter for four seconds
(disabling two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock
simultaneously). The parking lamps will illuminate twice to indicate that
two-stage unlock was enabled or disabled.
When two stage unlocking is disabled, intelligent access at the driver’s
door results in an unlock of all doors (not just the driver door).
Locking the doors
1. Press
and release to lock all the doors. The parking lamps will
illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed. Note: The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp
and the turn lamps will illuminate if all the doors and liftgate are closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is not closed, the horn will chirp twice
and the lamps will not flash.
Opening the power liftgate (if equipped)
Press
twice within three seconds to fully unlatch and open the
liftgate.
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area
before using power liftgate control.
In order to fully lower and latch the liftgate, press the control twice.
If the liftgate stops mid travel, it may have detected an obstacle, Check
to ensure the liftgate swing zone is free from obstruction and reset the
power assist by manually closing the liftgate. Normal operation can then
be resumed.
163
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
WARNING: Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust
fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the
vehicle.
Car finder
Press
twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the turn lamps
will flash for a maximum of three minutes. Press again or turn the
ignition on to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to time out in three
minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Memory feature
(seats, mirrors, adjustable pedals and steering column
The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) allows you to recall the
memory seat/power mirrors/adjustable pedals/steering column feature.
Press
to automatically move the seat, power mirrors, adjustable
pedals and steering column to the desired memory position. The mirrors
will move to the programmed position and the seat will move to the easy
entry position. The seat will move to the final position when the key is in
the ignition (if easy entry feature is enabled).
Programming memory feature to Transmitter
To activate this feature:
1. Move the driver seat, power mirrors, adjustable pedal and steering
column to the desired positions using the associated controls.
2. Press and hold the control button
1 for five seconds. A tone will be
heard after about two seconds
confirming memory position has
been set. Continue to hold until a
second tone is heard after five
seconds.
164
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
3. Within three seconds press the
4. A tone will be heard when the transmitter programming is complete.
5. Press the
.
.
6. Repeat this procedure for memory 2 and another transmitter if
desired.
Deprogramming memory feature from Transmitter
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver’s door for five
seconds. A tone will be heard after 11⁄2 seconds when the memory store
is done, continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds.
2. Within three seconds press the
.
3. A tone will be heard when the deactivation is complete.
4. Repeat this procedure for transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The Intelligent Access key (IA key) uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the backup key from the
transmitter, then twist a thin coin in
the slot hidden behind the backup
key slot to remove the battery
cover.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals or on the back
surface of the circuit board.
165
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
2. Remove the old battery.
Note: Please refer to local
regulations when disposing of
transmitter batteries.
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to
the instructions inside the IA key
for the correct orientation of the
battery. Press the battery down to
ensure that the battery is fully
seated in the battery housing cavity.
4. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the
backup key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IA key to become
deprogrammed from your vehicle. They should operate normally after
battery replacement.
Replacing lost Intelligent Access Keys (IA keys)
If you would like to have your IA keys reprogrammed because you lost
one, or would like to buy additional transmitters you can either
reprogram them yourself, or take all transmitters to your authorized
dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Intelligent Access Keys (IA keys)
To program a new IA keys yourself, refer to SecuriLock passive
anti-theft section of this chapter. Note: At least two already
programmed transmitters are required to perform this procedure
yourself.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps, parking lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped)
illuminate when the IA key or the keyless entry keypad is used to unlock
the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition is turned on, or
• the
control on the transmitter is pressed, or
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad, or
• the vehicle is locked using the key in the driver door cylinder, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
166
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Illuminated exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed, the ignition is turned off , the
interior dome lamps, parking lamps and puddle lamps (if equipped)
will illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the start button is pressed.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the lamps 10 minutes after the ignition
has been turned off.
• If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control, the
battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been
turned off.
• If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors
or the liftgate was opened, the battery saver will shut them off
10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
• The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned off.
Accessory mode battery saver for Intelligent Access Keys with
Push Button Start
The battery saver will shut off the ignition approximately 45 minutes
after the vehicle is left in Accessory Mode, in order to preserve the
vehicle’s battery.
167
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
The keypad, located near the driver’s window, is invisible until touched
and then it lights up so you can see and touch the appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad, the unlock
function may not work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors without
using a key.
• recall memory seat/power mirrors
and adjustable pedals (if
equipped).
• enable or disable the autolock
and autounlock features
• activate Intelligent Access at the
driver door, refer to Intelligent
Access in this chapter.
The keypad can be operated with
the factory set 5–digit entry code;
this code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to three of
your own 5–digit personal entry codes.
Note: Your keypad will still function normally if you enter your personal
entry code or factory set code. However, if your transmitter is within
range of the driver’s door, an Intelligent Access unlock will also occur
each time you press any number on the keypad. Note that this additional
unlock will not impact keypad functionality, and you can still enter your
code and perform all keypad functions (unlock, lock, liftgate release).
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory seats, mirrors, and adjustable pedals
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds touch the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. For memory recall feature, enter the sixth digit 1 • 2 to store driver 1
settings or 3 • 4 to store driver 2 settings.
168
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Note: Touching 5 • 6, 7 • 8, or 9 • 0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit
will not recall a driver memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
5. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal entry
code has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If the wrong code has been entered seven times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the
control on your transmitter.
• the ignition is turned on.
• the door is unlocked with a key
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: If the two-stage unlocking
feature is disabled, all doors will unlock; for more information regarding
two-stage unlocking, refer to the Central locking/Two stage unlocking
section earlier in this chapter.
To unlock all doors, enter the factory set code or your personal code,
then press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
169
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Note: If the Intelligent Access Key is within 3 feet (1 meter) of the
driver door, your keyless entry keypad code will still function the same
way, but the driver’s door will also unlock with each keypad button press.
To lock all doors, press and hold the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same
time (with the driver’s door closed) for one second will lock all doors.
You do not need to enter the keypad code first.
SECURILOCKா PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded Intelligent Access Keys programmed to your
vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a
“no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded Intelligent Access Keys; additional
coded transmitters may be purchased from your authorized dealer. The
authorized dealer can program your spare transmitters to your vehicle or
you can program then yourself. Refer to Programming spare Intelligent
Access Keys for instructions on how to program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster.
• When the ignition is off, the
indicator will flash once every two
seconds to indicate the
SecuriLock system is functioning
as a theft deterrent.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after turning the ignition off.
170
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
Automatic disarming
The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned on.
Replacement Intelligent Access Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two Intelligent Access Keys.
The Intelligent Access Key functions as both a programmed key that
operates the driver door lock, activates Intelligent Access with Push
Button Start systems as well as a remote keyless entry transmitter. A
maximum of four Intelligent Access Keys can be programmed to your
vehicle.
If your Intelligent Access Key are lost or stolen and you don’t have an
extra key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer. The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new keys
will need to be programmed.
Replacing Intelligent Access keys can be very costly. Store an extra
programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase
additional spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare Intelligent Access Keys
You must have two previously programmed Intelligent Access Keys inside
the vehicle and the new unprogrammed Intelligent Access Keys readily
accessible. If two previously programmed keys are not available, you
must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare
key(s) programmed.
Note: A maximum of four Intelligent Access Keys can be programmed to
your vehicle. If you would like to replace a previously programmed
access key with a new access key, or if you already have four access keys
programmed to your vehicle, you must take your vehicle and all access
keys to your authorized dealer to be erased and reprogrammed.
Ensure that the vehicle is off before beginning this procedure. Ensure
that all doors are closed before beginning this procedure and that all
doors remain closed throughout the procedure. Perform this procedure
exactly as described below, and perform all steps within 30 seconds of
starting the sequence. If any steps are performed out of sequence, stop
and wait for at least one minute before starting again.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Place the new unprogrammed Intelligent Access Key in the pocket
inside the center console utility compartment.
171
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
2. Press the driver or passenger power door unlock control three times.
3. Press and release the brake pedal one time.
4. Press the driver or passenger power door lock control three times.
5. Press and release the brake pedal one time. The indicator on the
Start/Stop button should begin to rapidly flash, indicating that
programming mode has been entered and two programmed Intelligent
Access Keys have been detected in the vehicle.
6. Within one minute, press the start/stop button. A message will be
displayed on the message center indicating that the new Intelligent
Access Key was programmed. If four Intelligent Access Keys have
already been programmed to your vehicle, you cannot program anymore
and the message MAX # OF KEYS LEARNED will be displayed on the
message center.
7. Remove Intelligent Access Key from utility compartment pocket and
press the
or
control on the newly programmed Intelligent Access
Keys to exit programming mode.
8. Verify that the remote entry functions operate (lock, unlock) and that
the vehicle starts with new Intelligent Access Key.
If the Intelligent Access Key has been successfully programmed, it can
be used to activate the Intelligent Access with Push Button Start feature
and can be used to start your vehicle.
Note: To program MyKey™ features, refer to MyKey™ in this chapter.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM
The perimeter anti-theft system will help protect your vehicle from
unauthorized entry.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL Intelligent Access Keys are brought to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
turn signal lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off. Any of the
following actions will prearm the alarm system:
• Press the
control on the transmitter.
172
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
When you press the lock control twice within three seconds on your
transmitter, the horn will chirp once to let you know that all doors, the
hood and the liftgate are closed. If any of these are not closed, the horn
will chirp twice to warn you that a door, the hood or the liftgate is still
open.
• Press the driver or passenger
power door lock control while the
door is open, then close the door.
• Press and hold the 7 • 8 and 9 •
0 controls on the keyless entry
pad at the same time to lock the
doors (driver’s door must be
closed).
• Lock the door by turning the key
in the door key cylinder.
There is a 20 second countdown
when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
Each door, the hood or the liftgate
is armed individually, and if any are
open, they must be closed for that
entry point to enter the 20 second
countdown.
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood or the
liftgate are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the
20 second countdown.
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using your transmitter.
• Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad.
• Unlock the driver door or all doors using the Intelligent Access.
• Unlock the driver’s door with a key. Turn the key toward the rear of
the vehicle to make sure the alarm disarms.
173
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locks and Security
• Turn ignition on.
• Press the
control on the transmitter. This will only shut off the
horn and parking lamps when the alarm is sounding. The alarm system
will still be armed.
Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed
mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if:
• Any door, the hood or the liftgate is opened without using the door
key, keypad or Intelligent Access Key.
• Turn the ignition on with an invalid SecuriLock key.
174
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.
175
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
First-row adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are
vertically adjustable.
The adjustable head restraints
consist of:
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position. Refer to
Adjusting the front manual seat later in this chapter.
2. Raise the head restraint by
pulling up on the head restraint.
3. Lower the head restraint by
pressing and holding the guide
sleeve adjust/release button and
pushing down on the head restraint.
176
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Simultaneously press and hold
both the adjust/release button and
the unlock/remove button, then pull
up on the head restraint.
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
177
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Adjusting the front power seat
Ten-way power seats
Move the front of the control up or
down to tilt the seat cushion.
Move the rear of the control up or
down to raise or lower the seat
cushion.
Move the control in the directions
shown to move the seat forward or
backward.
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.
178
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the two-way power lumbar support (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press the forward side of the control
to adjust firmness.
Press the rearward side of the
control to adjust softness.
Twelve-way power seat
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the front portion to tilt the
seat.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Press the control to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.
179
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the four-way power lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar control is located on the side of the seat cushion.
Press the front of the control to
adjust firmness.
Press the rear of the control to
adjust softness.
Press the top of the control to raise
the height of the lumbar support.
Press the bottom of the control to
lower the height of the lumbar
support.
Front-row heated and cooled seats
Heated seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press once to activate the high heat
setting (three indicator lights).
Continue pressing to scroll through
the other settings; medium heat
(two indicator lights), low heat (one indicator light) or off.
180
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The heated seats will turn off after 15 minutes.
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the heated seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Cooled seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press once to activate the high cool
setting (three indicator lights).
Continue pressing to scroll through
the other settings; medium cool
(two indicator lights), low cool (one indicator light) or off.
The cooled seats will turn off after 30 minutes.
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement
The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information
for more information.
• There is a filter located under the
rear of each front seat which can
be accessed from the second row
seat. Move the front seats all the
way forward and up to ease
access.
To remove the air filter:
1. Remove key from ignition.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter and rotate toward the
front of the vehicle once tabs are
released.
3. Remove filter.
181
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To install the filter:
• Position the filter in it’s housing
making sure that the far forward
end is all the way up in the
housing then push in on the
center of the outside edge of the
filter and rotate up into the
housing until it clips into position.
Memory seat/power mirrors/adjustable pedals
(if equipped)/steering column
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat,
outside rearview mirrors and
adjustable pedals to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat, exterior mirrors
and adjustable pedals to the
desired positions using the associated controls. Press and hold control
button 1 for at least two seconds. A tone will be heard when the
memory save is complete.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
button 2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park
(automatic transmission). A memory seat position may be programmed
at any time.
The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter
(unlock) control and the transmitter is
programmed to a memory seat position or when you enter a valid
customer code 1 or 2 on the keypad.
To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter..
Note: The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not
in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled.
182
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Easy access/easy out feature
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat rearward 2 in (5 cm)
when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the ignition is turned off
The seat will move to the original position when:
• the transmission is in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
• the ignition is put in accessory mode
The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle
message center. Refer to Message center in the Driver controls chapter.
REAR SEATS
Non-adjustable second-row outboard head restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with second row outboard head restraints that
are non-adjustable.
Note: Please read the warnings listed at the beginning of this chapter.
Six-passenger second row outboard head restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of :
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• and two guide sleeve
unlock/remove buttons (3).
183
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To remove the non-adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Simultaneously press and hold
both unlock/remove buttons, then
pull up on the head restraint.
To reinstall the non-adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Seven-passenger second row outboard head restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of :
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• and one guide sleeve
unlock/remove button (3).
184
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To remove the non-adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Press and hold the unlock/remove
button, then pull up on the head
restraint.
To reinstall the non-adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Adjustable second row center head restraint (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a head restraint in the second row
center seating position that is vertically adjustable.
The adjustable head restraint
consist of :
1
2
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
2
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
3
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove button (4).
185
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Raise the head restraint by
pulling up on the head restraint.
2. Lower the head restraint by
pressing and holding the guide
sleeve adjust/release button and
pushing down on the head restraint.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold both the
adjust/release button, then pull up
on the head restraint.
186
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
Adjusting second row bucket and bench seat back
Lift the handle to adjust seatback.
Using same control will fold the
seatback flat.
Note: For the bench seat only,
make sure the center safety belt is
unbuckled before folding the
seatback.
Adjusting second row seats (six-passenger vehicles only)
Lift the control to adjust the seat
forward or backward.
187
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the second-row power lumbar support
(six-passenger vehicles only)
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press the forward side of the control
to adjust firmness.
Press the rearward side of the
control to adjust softness.
Accessing the third row seats
Fold and tumble the second row seat to access the third row. Remove
items from the second row seat and ensure that no bulky objects such as
purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row seats
before tumbling them. For second row bench seats, make sure the center
safety belt is unbuckled before folding the seatback.
Note: You may have to move the front row seat forward to allow the 2nd
row seat to be fully tumbled.
1. Lift the handle located on the
side of the seat.
188
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The seatback will fold flat.
2. Lift the handle all the way up
until the seat releases from the
floor. Rotate the seat forward to
allow access to the third row.
3. To return the seatback to the
floor from tumbled position, rotate
the seat down until you hear it
latching to the floor.
189
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. To return the seatback to the
upright position
• Lift the seatback toward the rear
of the vehicle, and
• Rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the
upright position.
Note: The seatback will not raise if
the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor
striker. If the seatback does not raise, then repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. If the seat has a head restraint, pull the head restraint back up to its
normal adjusted position.
2nd row PowerFoldா and tumble seat
WARNING: Ensure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it
down. Folding the seat while occupied could result in occupant
injury or damage to the seat.
This feature is available for the right-hand seat on seven-passenger
vehicles and on both sides for six-passenger vehicles.
Press the control located at the
back of the rear door opening one
time to fold the seat back down and
tumble the seat forward for access
to the 3rd row.
Exiting the third row seat
1. Stow the second row center head restraint (if equipped) by pressing
the head restraint release button while sliding the head restraint fully
down.
190
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Pull on the strap located on the
back of the second row seat. This
will fold the seatback forward. Pull
the strap a second time to tumble
the seat forward, allowing easy exit
from the 3rd row seat.
3. To return the seatback to the
floor from tumbled position, rotate
the seat down until you hear it
latching to the floor.
4. To return the seatback to the
upright position
• Lift the seatback toward the rear
of the vehicle, and
• Rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the
upright position.
Note: The seatback will not raise if
the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor
striker. If the seatback does not raise, then repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. If the seat has a head restraint, pull the head restraint back up to its
normal adjusted position.
191
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Ensure that the rear latch hooks are
properly engaged with the floor
striker.
Note: Ensure that the seat and
seatback are latched securely in
position. Keep floor area free of
objects that would prevent proper
seat engagement.
WARNING: Do not adjust
or release the seat floor
latch while vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the vehicle with
seats in tumbled position. Always
latch the vehicle seat to the floor,
whether the seat is occupied or
empty. If not latched or if the seat
is tumbled, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
Second row heated seats (if equipped)
Note: For a list of warnings regarding personal injury and damage to the
seat, refer to Front-row heated and cooled seats earlier in this chapter.
To operate the heated seats:
• Press the button located on the
rear of the floor console once to
activate high heat.
• Press twice to activate low heat.
• Press a third time to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. For low
heat, one light will be lit; for high heat, both lights will be lit.
Second-row heated and cooled seats (if equipped)
Note: For a list of warnings regarding personal injury and damage to the
seat, refer to Front-row heated and cooled seats earlier in this chapter.
The second-row heated and cooled seat controls are located on the rear
of the floor console. They function the same as the front-row heated and
192
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
cooled seats. For instructions on how to use refer to Front-row heated
and cooled seats earlier in this chapter.
Second-row climate controlled seats air filter replacement
The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information
for more information.
There is an air filter located under the rear of each second-row seat. You
can tumble the seat forward to access the filter.
For instructions on how to remove and install the air filter, see Climate
controlled seats air filter replacement earlier in this chapter.
Stowing the third row seat
1. Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub.
2. From the rear of the vehicle, stow
the head restraints by pulling the
strap located on the middle of the
seatback just below the head
restraint, then fold seatback by
pulling and holding the number 1
strap while pushing the seatback
forward. Release strap once
seatback starts rotating forward.
3. Release the cushion latches by
pulling the number 2 strap while
pulling on the strap located at the
top of the seatback to tumble the
seat all the way into the tub in the
floor.
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo tie downs.
193
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Note: Do not use the third row
seatback as a load floor when the
seatback is folded.
Note: In order to allow the seat to latch in the stowed position, do not
stow objects under the seat before stowing.
Unstowing the third row seat
Note: Ensure that there are no objects such as books, purses or brief
cases on the load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure to remove all
objects from the top of the load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: Ensure the area under the forward portion of the load floor is free
of objects before unstowing the third row seat.
1. Unlatch and lift the seat out of
the tub in the floor by squeezing
and pulling up on the handle. Once
the seat is at a vertical position,
push the seat over, letting it fall
onto the latches.
2. To return the seatback to upright
position, pull the number 1 strap,
then while holding the number 1
strap, pull the long strap located on
the seatback to raise the seatback.
3. Pull the head restraints up to
their normal adjusted positions.
194
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Ensure the seat is latched to vehicle floor by
pushing/pulling on seat. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
Third row power seats (if equipped)
The Third Row Seat features a power one-touch operation that allows
you to adjust the Left, Right, or Both seats into a NORMAL, STOW,
FOLD, or TAILGATE position with just one touch of a button. The third
row seat also includes obstacle detection that allows the seat to stop and
reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that the obstacle can be
removed.
The third row power seat buttons are located behind the third row seats
on the left-hand quarter trim panel.
Note: The power fold seats work only when the vehicle is in P (Park)
and the tailgate is open. If the ignition is in the off position and the
feature is still running, the battery saver will turn it off after 10 minutes.
You can reactivate the power seats by pressing
on the remote entry
key fob or by using the unlock procedure on the keyless entry keypad.
Refer to Securicode™ keyless entry system in the Locks and Security
chapter. Keeping the key in accessory or run positions will prevent the
feature from timing out.
195
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
1
2
3
4
FOLD
RH
BOTH
NORMAL
STOW
TAILGATE
LH
Press the seat selection button (4) to select either right-hand seat, the
left-hand seat or both. First select the seat you would like to adjust, then
select one of the following:
• Press the NORMAL button (1) to return the seat to the normal
seating position.
• Press the STOW button (2) to stow the seat into the tub floor.
• Press the FOLD button (3) (the top portion of the button) to fold
down the seatback.
• Press the TAILGATE button (3) (the bottom portion of the button) to
put the seat into the tailgate position.
Note: Pressing a different button while the power seat feature is already
being performed may cause the first selected seat movement to be
cancelled. Allow the first seat movement to be completed before pressing
a button for another function.
Note: Ensure that there are no objects such as books, purses or brief
cases on the load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure to remove all
objects from the top of the load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: In order to allow the seat to complete the stowed position, do not
place objects under the seat before stowing. Remove all objects from the
seat and stowage tub.
196
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not drive
the vehicle when the third
row seat is rotated backwards.
During a sudden stop, the safety
belts are not functional in this
position, and during a sudden
stop, the third row seat can
rapidly tip back to the forward
position, all of which may result in
serious injury.
Closing the liftgate
WARNING: To avoid injury to third row occupants when closing
the liftgate, ensure that the head of any occupant is not in the
path of the closing liftgate.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System™ provides an improved overall level of
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating
the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of
occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System™ consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
197
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
The Personal Safety System™ can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System™ determined
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions (not rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts) unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration. The pretensioners are designed to activate in
frontal and near-frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System™ to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System™ to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
198
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, this occurs
because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other
occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by
safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash
braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary
injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident
statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the front.
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag. The system is designed to help protect small
(child size) occupants from airbag deployments when they are
improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to
proper child-seating or restraint usage recommendations. Even with this
technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly
restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger
front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of airbag(s) after a collision.
For warnings about properly restraining children, refer to Important SRS
precautions later in this chapter.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System™ to tailor the airbag deployment
and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the
safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
199
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management
feature- front outboard section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System™ is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System™ is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, driver seat
position sensor, and front passenger sensing system. In addition, the
RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System™ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety belt precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
200
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
201
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
All restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or
if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the safety
belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement.
Third-row safety belt stowage
To stow the safety belt, grasp both
portions of shoulder belt together in
one hand and slide into the safety
belt stowage clip as shown.
Both the outer and inner shoulder
belts must be kept in the stowage
clip together to prevent the
potential of wrinkling the cargo
shade.
WARNING: Do not stow
only one portion of the
shoulder belt in the stowage clip.
Wearing the shoulder belt in this
condition increases the amount of
belt slack and may reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in
the event of a collision.
202
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Energy management feature — front outboard
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a head-on collision.
• The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is
designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner.
This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user’s chest.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the belt
and retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have three
types of locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Webbing extraction sensitive mode
The webbing sensitive locking mode locks the webbing and prevents
more belt from being pulled out if the belt is pulled out too quickly. The
belt will unlock when you stop pulling on it.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat (except a
booster) is installed in a passenger front or rear seating position with a
combination lap/shoulder safety belt. Children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever
possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for
children later in this chapter.
203
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
WARNING: Ford Motor Company recommends that all
passenger safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware should
be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision to verify that
the Љautomatic locking retractorЉ feature for child seats is still working
properly. Safety belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized
dealer and must be replaced if either damage or improper operation is
noted. Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
204
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Front safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
squeeze and hold the buttons on the
side and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the buttons and
pull down on the height adjuster to
make sure it is locked in place.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the
occupant’s body at the start of the crash.
WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags, seat-mounted side airbags and Safety
Canopy, and safety belt pretensioners.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
205
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If...
Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Belt-Minderா
The Belt-Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
206
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder feature.
Note: If you are using MyKey™, the Belt-Minder warning will not
expire. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter.
If...
Then...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
The Belt-Minder feature will not
activate.
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The driver’s or front
The Belt-Minder feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
passenger’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have 30 seconds, repeating for
elapsed since the ignition
approximately five minutes or until
switch has been turned to on... the safety belts are buckled.
The driver’s or front
passenger’s safety belt becomes - the safety belt warning light
unbuckled for approximately illuminates and the warning chime
one minute while the vehicle is sounds for six seconds every
The Belt-Minder feature is activated
traveling at least 3 mph
(5 km/h) and more than
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
1-2 minutes have elapsed since the safety belts are buckled.
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
207
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given...
Consider...
“Crashes are rare events”
36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far”
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable”
We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
“I was in a hurry”
“Safety belts don’t work”
Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light”
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
208
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reasons given...
Consider...
“I have an airbag”
Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear”
Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a
latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag
system.
Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minderா feature
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder features must be
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the
same key cycle.
Note: If you are using MyKey™, the Belt-Minder cannot be disabled.
Also, if the Belt-Minder has been previously disabled, it will be
re-enabled during the use of MyKey™. Refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and security chapter.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park)
• The ignition switch is in the off position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
209
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE
ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (Approximately one
minute).
3. Wait 10 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off.
• Step 4 must be completed within 20 seconds after the completion of
Step 3.
4. For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
state.
• After Step 4, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
5. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will
flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by three
seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning
light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
210
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is designed to work in
conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term
“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement
to the safety belts. Airbags offer the most protection when used with
safety belts for crash conditions for which airbags are designed to deploy.
Airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not
deploy.
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.
211
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Do not place any object between an occupant and
an airbag or near any other airbag covering. The airbag may not
inflate properly and might force an object into that person causing
severe injury or death. The instrument panel grab handle should never
be used for storage. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear
at all times.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the air bag module as a
deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the air bag module.
Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your
authorized dealer.
212
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
Children and airbags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill
or injure a child in a child
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates airbag
inflation. The fact that the airbags
did not inflate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type
sufficient to cause activation. Front
airbags are designed to inflate in
213
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none
of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact
with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary
hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with
considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as
fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to
occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely
important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the
airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air
bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags).
• side airbags and Safety Canopy. Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag
system and Safety Canopy system later in this chapter.
214
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• one or more impact and safing sensors.
• driver and front passenger safety belt pretensioner
• a readiness light and tone.
• diagnostic module.
• the electrical wiring which connects the components.
• Front passenger sensing system. Refer to Front passenger sensing
system later in this chapter.
• “Passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp. Refer to
Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter.
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the airbag system readiness light, the airbag
back up power and the airbag ignitors.
Front passenger sensing system
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
• a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat.
215
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger side
airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a Љpassenger airbag offЉ or
Љpass airbag offЉ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. The indicator lamp is
located in the center of the instrument panel above the radio.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
Љpassenger airbag offЉ or Љpass airbag offЉ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
216
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Light
Occupant
Passenger Airbag
Empty seat
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Unlit
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
Small child with safety Lit
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Disabled
Enabled
Adult
Unlit
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children
12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
217
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Pass Airbag Off
Objects
Passenger Airbag
Indicator Light
Small (i.e. three-ring
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Unlit
Disabled
Medium (i.e. heavy
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
Lit
Disabled
Disabled
Lit
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if
equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger sensing system.
The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due
to the conditions described in the list above.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag Status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front
passenger seat sensing system.
218
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness lamp in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that
may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is
no longer illuminated
• If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
Determining if the system is operational
The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the
instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the
system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
219
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light
for front and side airbag system)
will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Seat-mounted side airbag system
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or
near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear
their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.
220
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable bag (airbag) with a
gas generator concealed behind
the outboard bolster of the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to
allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light,
electronic control and diagnostic
unit as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted in the front doors (one on each side of
the vehicle).
• Crash sensors located on the C pillars (one sensor on each pillar on
each side of the vehicle).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
221
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Several air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the side
airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system
(including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
Safety Canopyா System
WARNING: Do not place
objects or mount equipment
on or near the headliner at the
siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying Safety
Canopy. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk
of personal injury in the event of a
collision.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety
Canopy could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
Safety Canopy System, its fuses, the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or
the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy. See your
authorized dealer.
222
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS
and Safety Canopy System is provided.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy.
How does the Safety Canopyா system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
The Safety Canopy system consists
of the following:
• An inflatable curtain with a gas
generator concealed behind the
headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow
Safety Canopy deployment.
• The same readiness airbag light, electronic control and diagnostic unit
as used for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted in the front doors (one on each side of
the vehicle).
• Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side of the vehicle).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
223
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with
children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above the first and second row seats and part of the third row
seats. In certain lateral collisions or rollover events, the Safety Canopy
system will be activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and
occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact
collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover
events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover.
WARNING: If the Safety
Canopy system has
deployed, the Safety Canopy will
not function again unless replaced.
The Safety Canopy system
(including the A, B, C, and D
pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the Safety
Canopy is not replaced, it will
not function again, which will
increase the risk of injury in a
future collision.
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness
section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
224
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
• The readiness airbag light (same light as for front airbag system) will
either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system
may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event.
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the
horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact
that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or
the safety belt pretensioners.
The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are
taken by the driver or any other person:
• pressing the hazard control button,
• or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles
(including pretensioners)
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
225
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less Use a child safety
toddlers
(generally age four or younger)
seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier,
convertible seat,
or toddler seat).
Use a
Small
Children who have outgrown or no
children
longer properly fit in a child safety seat belt-positioning
(generally children who are less than
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are
greater than age four (4) and less than
age twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward
to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer)
booster seat.
226
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Larger
Children who have outgrown or no
Use a vehicle
children
longer properly fit in a belt-positioning safety belt having
booster seat (generally children who
are at least 4 feet 9 inches
the lap belt snug
and low across
(1.45 meters) tall or greater than 80 lb the hips, shoulder
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint
manufacturer)
belt centered
across the
shoulder and
chest, and
seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
227
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety
(lower (lower belt belt and belt
anchors anchors and
Safety
Restraint Child
LATCH
(lower
only
Type
Weight
and
only)
top
top
tether
anchor)
tether anchors
anchor and top
tether
anchor)
Rear
facing
Up to
48 lb
X
X
child seat (21 kg)
Forward Up to
facing
child seat (21 kg)
Forward Over
facing
48 lb
X
X
X
X
X
48 lb
child seat (21 kg)
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
228
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
229
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John
Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at
1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
230
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to help prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Step 5
below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
231
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
232
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
233
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of
movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Attaching child safety seats with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat.See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in
this chapter for more information.
234
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the
seating positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seat back,
below the locator symbols on the
seatback. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to
properly install a child seat with
LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.
235
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions
(center seating use)
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
520 mm (20.5 inches) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is
attached to that anchor.
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
least as far apart as those in this vehicle.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
236
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
child safety seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
in this chapter.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• 40/40 second row seats and
third-row passenger side
• 60/40 second row seats and
third-row passenger side
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
237
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Once the child safety seat has been installed, using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether
anchor:
1. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head
restraint posts.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected rear seating position.
• 2nd row bucket (40/40)
• 2nd row bench (60/40)
238
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
• 3rd row
Note: The cargo tie-downs at the
rear edge of the floor are not
tether anchors.
3. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
239
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
240
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
241
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
242
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seating and Safety Restraints
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.
243
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO CROSSOVER VEHICLE OWNERS
Crossover vehicles handle differently
than passenger cars in the various
driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways
and off-road. Crossover vehicles are
not designed for cornering at speeds
as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
WARNING: Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide for specific information about equipment
features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
All-wheel drive (AWD) System (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time all-wheel drive (AWD)
system. With the AWD option, power will be delivered to the front
wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The AWD
system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
244
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
For AWD vehicles, a spare tire of a different size other that the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire size (other than
the spare tire provided) or major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and
default to front-wheel drive.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD
vehicles. Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any
faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Crossover vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a
longer wheelbase.
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces.
As a result of the above dimensional differences, crossover vehicles often
will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
245
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
246
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
247
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
248
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or ЉblowoutЉ, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
249
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
TIRE CARE
Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
250
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
251
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire replacement requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
252
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
253
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle) will
help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life.
254
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
(front tires at top of diagram)
• Rear-wheel drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four-wheel drive
(4WD)/All-wheel drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
255
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
256
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating
Speed rating - mph (km/h)
81 mph (130 km/h)
87 mph (140 km/h)
99 mph (159 km/h)
106 mph (171 km/h)
112 mph (180 km/h)
118 mph (190 km/h)
124 mph (200 km/h)
130 mph (210 km/h)
149 mph (240 km/h)
168 mph (270 km/h)
186 mph (299 km/h)
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
257
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
258
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
259
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
260
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
261
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Changing tires with TPMS
Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor fastened
to the inside rim of the wheel.
The pressure sensor is covered
by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. The
pressure sensor is located
opposite (180 degrees) from the
valve stem. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is recommended that you always have your
tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low
Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,
your tire pressure still needs to be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org
for additional information.
262
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you
that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on
your vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS
in this section.
263
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System:
Low Tire
Pressure
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Solid Warning
Light
Tire(s)
1. Check your tire pressure to
under-inflated ensure tires are properly inflated;
refer to Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light will
turn OFF.
Spare tire in
use
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel/tire and reinstall it on the
vehicle to restore system
functionality. For a description on
how the system functions, refer to
When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the light remains ON, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
264
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Low Tire
Pressure
Possible
cause
Customer Action Required
Warning Light
Flashing Warning Spare tire in
Your temporary spare tire is in
use. Repair the damaged road
wheel and re-mount it on the
vehicle to restore system
Light
use
functionality. For a description of
how the system functions under
these conditions, refer to When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If your tires are properly inflated
and your spare tire is not in use
and the TPMS warning light still
flashes, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger
tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary over night with the
outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the
tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F
(17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be detected
by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure. If the low
tire pressure warning light is ON, visually check each tire to verify that no
tire is flat. (If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air
pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the
vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure.
265
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
SNOW TIRES AND CABLES/CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and cables. If you need to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE class “S” snow chains, snow cables, or equivalent on the
front axle for P235/55R19 equipped vehicles. The use of snow chains,
snow cables, or other traction assist devices that are larger than SAE
class “S” may cause damage to your vehicle’s wheel house, suspension
and/or body.
•
Do not install tire chains, cables, or optional traction devices on the rear
tires. This could cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house or body.
• Do not use tire chains, cables, or optional traction devices with
optional 255/45R20 tires.
• Install cable chains securely, verifying that the cables do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the cables. If this does not work, remove
the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire cables on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire cables on your vehicle.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
266
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
267
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
268
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
269
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
270
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicles’ braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
271
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1,400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1,400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have
enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
272
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. For your safety and to
maximize vehicle performance, be sure to use the proper equipment
while towing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1,000 miles (1,600 km).
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this section.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
Special Operating Conditions in your scheduled maintenance
guide.
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading - with and without a trailer in this chapter.
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded vehicle when
figuring the total weight.
273
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
FWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Class
Maximum
GCWR - lb
(kg)
Trailer weight Tongue load -
- lb (kg)
lb (kg)
Class I towing
(standard)
Class III towing 9450 (4288)
(optional)
6900 (3131)
2000 (907)*
4500 (2042)*
200 (91)
450 (204)
*For towing trailers up to 3500 lb (1588 kg), use a weight-carrying
hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through
the vehicle’s underbody structure. For towing trailers over 3500 lb
(1588 kg), up to 4500 lb (2042 kg), it is recommended to use a
weight-distributing hitch to increase front axle load while towing.
AWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Class
Maximum
GCWR - lb
(kg)
Trailer weight Tongue load -
range - lb (kg) lb (kg)
Class I towing
(standard)
Class III towing 9620 (4365)
(optional)
7070 (3208)
2000 (907)*
4500 (2042)*
200 (91)
450 (204)
*For towing trailers up to 4500 lb (2042 kg), use a weight-carrying
hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through
the vehicle’s underbody structure.
274
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
EcoBoost AWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weight
Class
Maximum
GCWR - lb
(kg)
Trailer weight Tongue load -
range - lb (kg) lb (kg)
Class I towing
(standard)
Class III towing 9750 (4424)
(optional)
7200 (3267)
2000 (907)*
4500 (2042)*
200 (91)
450 (204)
*For towing trailers up to 4500 lb (2042 kg), use a weight-carrying
hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through
the vehicle’s underbody structure.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper; use a load
carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Weight-distributing hitch
When hooking-up a trailer using a load-equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it
can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
275
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
1
the front bumper height is within ⁄2 in. (13 mm) of the reference point.
After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in
Step 2.
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of
the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling,
and could result in serious personal injury.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
276
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Trailer brake controller connector (if equipped)
The trailer brake controller
connector is located under the
instrument panel above the brake
pedal.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Do not
connect trailer lamps directly to your vehicle’s tail lamps. This can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical system. Contact your authorized
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for
hooking-up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• It is recommended to select the “M” gear position when additional
engine braking is needed. In situations such as prolonged downhill
driving on steep grades (i.e., driving in mountainous areas), additional
engine braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular
brake system to prevent them from overheating. For more information
277
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
on transmission operation and gear positions, see Automatic
transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing-up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift into the lowest gear
position. Do not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat
and become less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow
your vehicle for personal travel (such as behind a motor home or a
truck).
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
Controls chapter for more information.
In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, please refer to
Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles:
Tow your FWD vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the
front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider.
278
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires, Wheels and Loading
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles:
Tow your AWD vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do not tow your
AWD vehicle with the front wheels off the ground (by using a tow
dolly) and the rear wheels on the ground; this will cause damage
to your AWD system. If you are using a vehicle transport trailer, follow
the instruction specified by the equipment provider.
Note: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, follow
these instructions:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the transmission shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Place the ignition in the accessory position (refer to Starting in the
Driving chapter).
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)
• Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning
of each day and at each fuel stop.
279
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
STARTING
Ignition modes
1. Off — This position shuts the engine and all electrical accessories off.
Press and release the START/STOP button without applying the brake
pedal when your vehicle is in accessory or on modes or when the engine
is running. Note: When the vehicle is in motion, a single press and
release of the START/STOP button will not switch off the engine. In
order to switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion, press and
hold the START/STOP button for at least one second.
2. Accessory — This allows electrical accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running. Press and release the
START/STOP button without applying the brake pedal. ACCESSORY
POWER ACTIVE and PRESS BRAKE TO START will be displayed in the
message center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for more information.
3. On — This will power your vehicle’s electrical system and the warning
lights in the instrument cluster will illuminate, but the engine will remain
off. Press and hold the START/STOP button for at least one second
without applying the brake pedal.
4. Start — Cranks the engine. Press the START/STOP button (for any
length of time) while applying the brake pedal.
Starting your vehicle
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
Don’t press the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the
accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more
information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this
chapter.
To avoid potential transmission damage at extremely cold temperatures
(below -20°F [-30°C]), it is recommended that the vehicle be warmed up
to normal operating temperature before driving at highway speeds above
50 mph (80 km/h). Normal operating temperature is normally reached
after 10 minutes of moderate driving or idling.
280
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order
to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure vehicle accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
281
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• Make sure the gearshift lever is in
P (Park).
Push button start system
Your vehicle is equipped with the
push button start system, you can
start your vehicle by pressing the
start button in combination with the
brake pedal. The start button is
located on the instrument panel to
the right of the steering wheel.
Note: To start your vehicle, your
Intelligent Access key (IA key) must
be present inside the vehicle.
Starting the engine
1. Press the START/STOP button (for any length of time) while applying
the brake pedal. Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system
that assists in starting the engine. After releasing the button from the 4
(start) position, the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds
or until the vehicle starts.
Note: You cannot immediately start your vehicle from the on mode, you
must first switch the vehicle off. Note: The indicator light on the start
button will illuminate when the vehicle is in on mode and when the
engine is started.
2. After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, apply the
brake, shift into gear and drive.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the vehicle to the
off position, wait 10 seconds and try Step 1 again. If the engine still fails
to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 1 again, keeping
the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above
cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off
in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
282
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
There may be areas inside your vehicle where the IA key is not detected.
If the message NO KEY DETECTED appears on your message center
when you press the START/STOP button, it may be necessary to move
your IA key to another area within the vehicle. The IA key may not be
detected near the roof (between the driver or passenger sunvisor and
the roof, or in the overhead console area), or in the third row seat cup
holder and armrest area, or in the extreme corners of the rear package
tray, near your audio speakers. It is not recommended that you stow the
IA key in these locations. If you move the IA key to a location where it
has been detected before and you still see the NO KEY DETECTED
message, your IA key’s battery may be low or you may be in an area with
excessive radio frequency interference. If this occurs, you can use the
back-up method to start your vehicle (see below).
Back-up Method of Starting: Your
IA key uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle
and authorize your vehicle to start
when you press the START/STOP
button and apply the brake pedal. If
excessive radio frequency
interference is present in the area,
or if the battery in your IA key is
low, it may be necessary to start
your car by inserting the IA key in
the back-up slot, located in the rear of the center console utility
compartment. Insert the IA key into the slot with buttons facing out and
with key ring up. After inserting the IA key into the back-up slot, use the
START/STOP button and brake pedal to start your vehicle as usual. The
vehicle should respond normally as long as the IA key is in the back-up
slot in the center console utility compartment. Once the vehicle is
started, the IA key can be removed from the back-up slot, if desired.
Fast Restart Feature: The Fast Restart feature allows you to re-start
your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching the vehicle off, if a valid IA
key is not present when the vehicle is switched off. When you switch
your vehicle off without an IA key in the passenger compartment, the
message RESTART NOW OR KEY IS NEEDED will be displayed in the
message center. You can re-start the vehicle (by applying the brake pedal
and pressing the START/STOP button) for up to 20 seconds, even
though the IA key is not present. After 20 seconds have expired, you can
no longer start your vehicle without the IA key present inside the
vehicle.
283
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Switching the Vehicle Off when not in Park: It is recommended that
you shift into the P (Park) position before switching your vehicle off. If
you switch your vehicle off with the shifter in any position other than P
(Park), the message SHIFT TO PARK will be displayed in the message
center. If the vehicle is left in this state, your key in ignition chime will
activate when the driver door is opened, and you may drain your
vehicle’s battery. In order to avoid draining your battery, it is
recommended that you always shift to P (Park) before or immediately
after switching your vehicle off.
Absence of the Intelligent Access key: Once the vehicle has started,
the vehicle will remain running until being turned off by the
START/STOP button, even if the IA key is no longer found in the vehicle.
Whenever a door is opened and then closed while the vehicle is running,
the system will search for an IA key inside the vehicle and the message
center will display NO KEY DETECTED if the IA key is no longer
present. This message is a reminder that someone else in the vehicle
may have taken the IA key when exiting the vehicle. If the IA key is no
longer present in the vehicle, you will not be able to re-start your vehicle
outside of the Fast Restart time (see Fast Restart Feature above). It is
important to be aware of where your IA key is located in the vehicle, to
avoid becoming stranded without an IA key.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or
air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
284
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug/engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
285
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater will use .4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. Your
factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat;
however, maximum temperature is attained after approximately three
hours of operation. Block heater operation longer than three hours will
not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional
electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Warning lights and
!
P
chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
286
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
ABS
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS is disabled due to a malfunction and needs to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.
!
P
BRAKE
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned on) until the
parking brake is released.
!
P
BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
287
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Press the parking brake pedal
downward again to release the
parking brake. Driving with the
parking brake on will cause the
brakes to wear out quickly and
reduce fuel economy.
Note: If the vehicle is driven with
the parking brake applied, a chime
will sound.
ADVANCETRACா WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL™ (RSCா)
STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac with RSC system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the
tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors. Reducing the effectiveness
of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
288
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle,
potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac with RSC system
activates, SLOW DOWN.
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac with RSC system, the “sliding car” icon
will
illuminate steadily and you may hear a chime. If equipped with a
message center, the vehicle will also indicate a failure with the Brake
system, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. .
Your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system. The
AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability
enhancement features for certain driving situations:
• Traction control system (TCS), which functions to help avoid
drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.
• Electronic stability control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides
• Roll Stability Control™ (RSC), which functions to help avoid a
vehicle roll-over.
The AdvanceTrac with RSC system automatically enables each time
the engine is started. All features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system
(TCS, ESC, and RSC are active and monitor the vehicle from start-up).
However, the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires
it.
The AdvanceTrac with RSC
system includes an AdvanceTrac
with RSC button on the center of
the instrument panel, the “sliding
car” icon
and a “sliding car off”
icon
in the instrument cluster. Both the “sliding car” icon
and the
289
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
“sliding car off” icon
in the instrument cluster will illuminate
temporarily during start-up as part of a normal system self-check. The
“sliding car” icon may illuminate (flash) during certain driving
situations which cause the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate.
If the “sliding car” icon illuminates steadily, have the system serviced
by an authorized dealer immediately. The message center will also
indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
When AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a normal system self-check,
some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a
rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac with RSC you may
experience the following:
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The “sliding car”
indicator light will flash.
• If your foot is on the brake pedal, a vibration in the pedal.
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
• The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction control system (TCS)
Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem: engine traction control and brake traction
control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit
wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is
slipping. Traction control is most active at low speeds.
During TCS events the “sliding car” icon
will flash.
in the instrument cluster
290
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time, the braking
portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, TCS will use only engine power
reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over-spinning.
When the brakes have cooled down, the system will regain all features.
Anti-lock braking, RSC, and ESC will continue to function during the
cool-down period.
The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. See the Switching off Traction Control
section following.
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Electronic stability control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
During ESC events the “sliding car” icon
will flash.
in the instrument cluster
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system, which
include but are not limited to:
• Taking a turn too fast
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC)
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC) may help to maintain roll stability of the
vehicle during adverse maneuvers. RSC operates by detecting the
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the
brakes to one or more wheels individually.
During an event that activates the RSC system, the “sliding car”
icon
in the instrument cluster will flash.
291
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the RSC system, which
include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
Switching off Traction Control
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off the traction Control features of the AdvanceTrac
with RSC system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to
spin. This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum
through the obstacle.
To switch off the Traction Control
press the AdvanceTrac with RSC
button. Full features of the TCS can
be restored by pressing the
AdvanceTrac with RSC button
again or by turning off and restarting the engine.
If you switch off the Traction
Control, the “sliding car off”
icon
will illuminate steadily.
OFF
Pressing the AdvanceTrac with
RSC button again will turn off the
“sliding car off” icon.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction
control features will continue to function; however, ESC and RSC are
disabled.
292
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
AdvanceTrac Features
“Sliding
car off”
icon
Control
switch
functions
Message
center dis-
play
ESC/
RSC
Mode
TCS
Turns on
Default at System Initial- during
Nothing dis-
played
En-
abled
Enabled
start-up
ization
bulb
check
Control
switch
pressed
once mo-
mentarily
Control
switch
pressed
TRACTION
CONTROL
OFF
Traction Con-
trol OFF
En-
abled
Dis-
abled
On
Off
AdvanceTrac
ADVANCE-
TRAC ON
En-
abled
Enabled
again after fully enabled
deactiva-
tion
Trailer sway control (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with trailer sway control. When properly
equipped, trailer sway control will use the vehicle’s AdvanceTrac with
RSC system to detect and mitigate trailer sway by applying brake force
at individual wheels and, if necessary, by reducing engine power.
Note: Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from swaying, it
mitigates the sway from increasing once it has occurred. TSC cannot
stop all trailers from swaying. If you are experiencing trailer sway it is
likely that the trailer is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight
or the speed of the vehicle and trailer is too high. Pull the vehicle-trailer
over to a safe location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue
load and reduce speed to a safe level while towing. If trailer sway is
experienced, SLOW DOWN. Always use caution when towing a trailer
and follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to Trailer towing
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information on
towing a trailer with your vehicle.
293
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
During trailer sway control events the
icon in the instrument cluster
will flash momentarily. The cluster message center will also display
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED. In some cases when trailer sway is
detected, the vehicle speed is too high and may be at or above a speed
at which trailer sway will grow continuously. This may cause the system
to activate multiple times, causing a gradual reduction in speed.
Disabling trailer sway control
Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle. To disable
trailer sway control, refer to the Message center in the Instrument
Cluster chapter. Note that regardless of chosen enable state, trailer sway
control will be re-enabled each new key cycle.
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of
loss of vehicle control, serious injury, or death. Ford does not
recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (e.g., hill climbing), the driver has
significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.
STEERING
3.5L EcoBoost engine (if equipped): Your vehicle is equipped with an
Electric Power Steering (EPS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to
check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes
for you to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and
permanent damage to your steering system. If this should occur, you will
neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause
permanent damage. Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the
system to cool and steering assist will return to normal.
The EPS system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the
EPS system to ensure proper operation. When a system error is
detected, the following message SERVICE POWER STEERING, SERVICE
POWER STEERING NOW or POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT may
display in the message center, refer to the Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
294
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: The EPS system has diagnostics checks that
continuously monitor the EPS system to ensure proper operation
of the electronic system. When an electronic error is detected, the
message POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT will be displayed in the
message center. If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
turn off the engine. After at least 10 seconds, reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the message center for POWER
STEERING ASSIST FAULT. If the message returns, or returns while
driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the
message displayed, the steering assist is turned off, making the vehicle
harder to steer.
WARNING: If the message SERVICE POWER STEERING is
displayed in the message center, the EPS system has detected a
problem with the system function. On the next key cycle the message
SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW will be displayed and steering
assist will be removed until the steering system is serviced. Have your
vehicle taken to the nearest dealer as soon as possible.
3.7L V6 Duratec engine: Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic
steering system.
To help prevent damage to the power steering system, never hold the
steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than
a few seconds when the engine is running. If the power steering system
breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle
manually, but it takes more effort.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the steering wanders or pulls equipped with either EPS or hydraulic
steering system, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
295
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless the brake pedal is applied. If you cannot move
the gearshift lever out of P (Park) when the ignition is on and the brake
pedal applied, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brake
lamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the
Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown and the brakelamps are working properly, you
will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Switch the ignition to off,
and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
Your transmission is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in
the vehicle computer. This feature is designed to increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
296
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
transmission operation. Additionally, whenever the battery is
disconnected or a new battery installed, the strategy must be relearned.
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6–speed automatic
transmission
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the front wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.
297
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
M (Manual) with Grade Assist
Initially, moving the lever to M (Manual) activates grade assist and
cancels overdrive.
Grade Assist:
• Provides additional grade
(engine) braking and extends
lower gear operation on uphill
climbs for hilly terrain or
mountainous areas.
• Provides additional engine
braking through the automatic
transmission shift strategy which
reacts to vehicle inputs (vehicle
acceleration, accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed).
• Allows the transmission to select gears that will provide the desired
engine braking based on the vehicle inputs mentioned above. This will
increase engine RPM during engine braking.
• The grade assist indicator in the
instrument cluster is illuminated.
Grade assist is designed to aid the
driver with optimal gear selection in
hilly terrain or mountainous areas
but is not intended for normal operation. It is recommended that you
return to O/D (overdrive mode) on flat terrain to provide the best fuel
economy and transmission function.
To return to normal D (Drive) position (with O/D), move the shift lever
back from M (Manual) to D (Drive).
• The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated.
• The transmission will operate in gears one through six.
298
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission (SST)
This vehicle is equipped with a
SelectShift Automatic™
transmission (SST) gearshift lever.
SST is an automatic transmission
with the ability for the driver to
change gears up or down (without a
clutch) as desired. By moving the
gearshift lever from drive position D
(Drive) to M (Manual) you now
have control of selecting the gear
you desire using the paddle shifters
on the steering wheel.
Paddle shifters
The paddle shifters allow you to shift gears quickly, without taking your
hands off the steering wheel.
1. To manually downshift the
transmission with the gearshift lever
in M (Manual), press the paddle
shifters forward.
2. To manually upshift the
transmission with the gearshift lever
in M (Manual), pull the paddle
shifters rearward.
Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating
(recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1 - 2
2 - 3
3 - 4
4 - 5
5 - 6
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
45 mph (72 km/h)
50 mph (80 km/h)
299
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
The instrument cluster will show the
current selected gear you are in.
In order to prevent the engine from
running at too low an RPM, which
may cause it to stall, the SST will
automatically make some downshifts
even if it has determined that you
have not downshifted in time.
Although the SST will make some
downshifts for you, it will still allow
you to downshift at any time as long
as the SST determines that the engine will not be damaged from
over-revving.
Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held
without shifting.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as
contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the RSS.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the ground.
300
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
The RSS detects obstacles up to six
feet (two meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio will return
to the previous value.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows
the driver to disable the system, refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
301
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM
The rearview camera system,
located on the liftgate, provides a
video image, which appears on the
navigation system screen, of the
area behind the vehicle. It adds
assistance to the driver while
reversing or reverse parking the
vehicle.
To use the camera system, place the transmission in R (Reverse); an
image will display on the navigation screen. The area displayed on the
screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and/or road
condition.
• (1) Rear bumper
• (2) Red zone
• (3) Yellow zone
• (4) Green zone
• (5) Center line of vehicle
Always use caution while backing.
Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the
green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones.
Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both
sides and rear of the vehicle. When shifting out of reverse and into any
other gear, the image will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off
to assist in parking or trailer hookup.
After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park),
the image will remain until the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h),
only if the rear camera delay feature is on, or until any navigation radio
button is pressed.
Note: The default setting for the rear camera delay is off. Press the
“Settings” button found on the navigation screen to set the rear camera
delay feature to on or off.
302
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
When towing, the camera system will only see what is being towed
behind the vehicle; this might not provide adequate coverage as it
usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be
seen.
The camera lens for the camera is located on the liftgate. Keep the lens
clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted. Clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.
WARNING: The camera system is a reverse aid supplement
device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with
the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the camera system with the liftgate
open.
If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged, then check with your
authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Night time and dark area use
At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.
Servicing
• If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
• If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the
lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear
after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
303
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The collision warning with brake support, is designed to alert the driver
of certain collision risks with a red warning light located above the
dashboard and an audible warning chime. The brake support assists the
driver in reducing the collision speed, by pre-charging the brakes.
WARNING: This system is designed to be a supplementary
driving aid. It is not intended to replace the driver’s attention,
and judgment, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT
activate the brakes automatically. Failure to press the brake pedal to
activate the brakes may result in a collision.
WARNING: The Collision Warning System with Brake Support
cannot help prevent all collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed.
Note: The collision warning with brake support will not detect, warn, or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of the
vehicle.
Operation
The radar sensor detects vehicles
ahead that are moving in the same
direction as your vehicle.
If the radar detects that your
vehicle is rapidly closing on another
vehicle a red warning light will
illuminate and an audible warning
chime will sound.
After that, if the risk of collision
further increases after the warning
light, the brake support prepares
the brake system for rapid braking.
This may be perceptible to the
driver. However, the system will not
automatically activate the brakes.
The vehicle will not stop unless the driver presses the brake pedal. If the
brake pedal is pressed then braking is implemented with full brake
function, even if the force on the brake pedal is light.
The collision warning system is active at speeds above approximately
5 mph (8 km/h).
304
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Collision Warning System Limitations
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances
where vehicles will not provide a collision warning. These include:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see also blocked sensor section).
• Debris build up on the grille near the headlamps (see block sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements are large (very active driving
style).
• High interior temperatures, which may deactivate the illumination or
the warning lamps until the interior temperature reduces (audible
warning will alert the driver).
In addition, sun load and sunglasses may reduce the visibility of the
warning lamps. Therefore, it is recommended to keep the audible
warning on.
WARNING: The collision warning system’s brake support can
only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the
driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal must be pressed
just like for any typical braking situation.
Blocked sensor
If a message regarding a blocked
sensor is displayed, the radar signals
from the sensor, located behind a
fascia cover near the driver side of
the lower grille, have been
obstructed. When the radar signals
are obstructed, a vehicle ahead
cannot be detected and the Collision
Warning system will not function.
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message
being displayed.
305
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Cause
Action
The surface of the radar in the
grille is dirty or obstructed in
some way
Clean the grille surface in front of
the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the
grille is clean but the message
remains in the display
Wait a short time. It may take
several minutes for the radar to
detect that it is no longer
obstructed
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is
interfering with the radar signals
Do not use the Collision Warning
System in these conditions
because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions
Do not use the Collision Warning
System in these conditions
because it may not detect, warn,
or respond to potential collisions
Swirling water, or snow or ice on
the surface of the road may
interfere with the radar signals
Activating/deactivating collision warning system
To turn the warning system and/or chime on or off and set the warning
sensitivity <– –>, refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off in a MyKey™ equipped vehicle,
refer to MyKey™ in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as being too frequent or
disturbing then the warning sensitivity can be reduced, though the
manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system
warnings. Refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for instructions on reducing the sensitivity.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (APA) (IF EQUIPPED)
Active Park Assist (APA) will detect an available parallel parking space
and automatically steer the vehicle into the space (hands free) while you
control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system will visually
and/or audibly instruct the driver to park the vehicle.
306
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: This system is designed to be a supplementary park
aid. It may not work in all conditions and is not intended to
replace the driver’s attention and judgment. The driver is responsible
for avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe distance and speed, even
when the APA is in use.
Conditions in which the system may not work:
• Something passes between the front bumper and the space such as a
pedestrian or cyclist
• The edge of the vehicle is high from the ground such as a bus, tow
truck, or flat bed truck
Automatic Search for Parking Space
To start, press the APA control
switch (on the center console). The
message center will display ACTIVE
PARK SEARCHING. To designate
what side of the street to search on,
use the turn signal. The arrow
symbols >> and << in the message
center indicate on which side of the
vehicle APA will park. (If the turn
signal is not on, the system will
automatically search the passenger
side.)
For best performance, the driver should drive the vehicle as parallel as
possible while passing a parking space. If driven too fast (above 18 mph
[30 km/h]) for the system to measure parking spaces, the message center
will display ACTIVE PARK REDUCE SPEED.
When the system has found a space, the message center will display
SPACE FOUND PULL FORWARD followed by a chime. Drive forward
307
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
until the message center displays SPACE FOUND STOP followed by a
chime. When you stop the vehicle in position to begin parking, the
message center displays REMOVE HANDS PUT IN REVERSE. The driver
should always come to a complete stop before changing gears.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Automatic steering is activated when you stop the vehicle, remove your
hands from the steering wheel and select the R (Reverse) gear. Be sure
the steering wheel motion is not obstructed by any objects. The vehicle
will steer itself from this point on as you follow the instructions in the
message center to safely move the vehicle reverse and forward in the
space. You may cancel APA at anytime by grabbing the steering wheel or
by pressing the APA control switch. When the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
the message center displays BACK UP USE CAUTION.
When you determine the vehicle is back far enough or you hear a solid
tone from the Reverse Sensing System, bring the vehicle to a complete
stop and move the gearshift to D (Drive). The message center will now
display PULL FORWARD USE CAUTION followed by a chime.
When you determine the vehicle is far enough forward or a solid tone
from the Forward Sensing System (if equipped) is heard, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and move the gearshift to R (Reverse). The
message center may display BACK UP SLOWLY USE CAUTION followed
308
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
by a chime. The system may offer subsequent backward and forward
maneuvers before proceeding to the finish phase.
APA Finished
When Active Park Assist has completed the automated steering, the
message center displays ACTIVE PARK FINISHED followed by a chime.
The driver is responsible to assess and correct as necessary the final
parking position and put the vehicle in P (Park).
The system can also be deactivated at any time by the following:
• Pressing the APA control switch
• Grabbing the steering wheel
• Exceeding a vehicle speed of 18 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds during
Active Park Searching
• Exceeding a vehicle speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) during automatic
steering
• Deactivating the AdvanceTrac system or the system has activated on
a slippery or loose surface
• ABS activation or failure
• Any door (except the driver’s door) opens
• Something touching the steering wheel
If a fault is present in the system, the message ACTIVE PARK FAULT
will be displayed followed by a chime. Contact an authorized dealer to
have your vehicle serviced.
The system should not be used if:
• A foreign object (i.e. bike rack, trailer, etc.) is attached to the front or
rear of the vehicle or at another location close to the sensors.
• The front bumper or side sensors are damaged (i.e. in a collision) or
obstructed by a foreign object (i.e. front bumper cover).
309
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• A mini-spare tire is used
Troubleshooting
Why isn’t APA searching for a parking space?
• You may have deactivated the AdvanceTrac system.
• One of the doors (except the driver’s door) may not be securely
closed.
Why doesn’t APA offer a particular parking space?
• Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors. Clear
any material stuck to the sensors.
• There may not be enough room to maneuver the vehicle into the
space. Remember, there needs to be enough space on the opposite
side of the vehicle to allow the front of the vehicle to swing out as you
back into the space.
• The vehicle is not driven close enough to the parking space, less than
60 inches [1.5 m] from neighboring parked vehicles.
• The vehicle is driven too close to the side objects (e.g. less than
16 inches [41 cm] from neighboring parked vehicles).
• You may be driving in R (Reverse). APA can only look for a parking
space while moving forward.
Why doesn’t APA position the vehicle where I want in the space?
• The driver allows the vehicle to roll in the opposite direction of the
transmission (such as rolling forward when R (Reverse) gear is
selected.
• You may be driving in R (Reverse). APA can only look for a parking
space while moving forward.
• There may be an irregular curb along the parking space. APA might
not be able to align the vehicle to curbs that are damaged, very
shallow or covered with material such as debris, leaves, snow, or tarps.
• The vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned
appropriately.
• The vehicle was steered more that usual while driving by the space.
APA performs best when you drive the same distance from the
parking space the entire length of the space.
• The tires may not be installed and maintained correctly. For example,
one or more tires may not be inflated correctly, may not be of the
same size, or may not be authorized for use on this vehicle.
310
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• The vehicle had a repair or alteration that is not authorized by the
manufacturer.
• One of the parked vehicles has a high altitude attachment (i.e. salt
sprayer, snow plow, moving truck high bed, etc.) High altitude
attachments may not be detected by the system.
• The parking space length or parked objects position have changed
after the vehicle has passed the parking space.
• The temperature around your vehicle changed quickly such as you
just drove from a heated garage into the cold or just left a car wash.
As a result, the outside air temperature displayed in the vehicle may
not be close enough to the actual temperature. APA relies on a
correctly sensing the temperature outside for precisely positioning the
vehicle.
BLIND SPOT MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Blind spot mirrors have an
integrated convex spotter mirror
built into the upper outboard corner
of the outside mirrors. They are
designed to assist the driver by
increasing visibility along the side of
the vehicle. For more information on
your side view mirrors, refer to
Exterior mirrors in the Driver Controls chapter.
311
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Driving with blind spot mirrors
Before a lane change, check the
main mirror first, then check the
blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are
present in the blind spot mirror and
the traffic in the adjacent lane is at
a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over
your shoulder to verify traffic is
clear, and carefully change lanes.
3
2
When the approaching vehicle is at
a distance, its image is small and
near the inboard edge of the main
mirror. As the vehicle approaches,
the image becomes larger and
begins to move outboard across the
main mirror (1). As the vehicle
approaches its image will transition
from the main mirror and begin to
appear in the blind spot mirror (2).
As the vehicle leaves the blind spot
1
mirror it will transition to the driver’s peripheral field of view (3).
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
312
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLISா) WITH CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) (IF EQUIPPED)
The BLIS is a convenience feature
that aids the driver in assessing
whether a vehicle is within an area
on either side of the vehicle
extending rearward from the outside
mirrors to approximately 10 feet
(three meters) beyond the bumper.
This area is referred to as the blind
zone. The BLIS will alert the driver
to the presence of motorized
vehicles in these areas while driving
on roads and freeways.
The system is not designed to
prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects. The system is designed
to provide a warning to assist the
driver in detecting vehicles in the blind zones. The system will not detect
infrastructure, pedestrians, or cyclists.
WARNING: To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS as a
replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking
over your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS is not a replacement
for careful driving and only an assist.
The BLIS and CTA has an yellow
indicator (also referred to as the
alert) located in the left and right
exterior mirrors. When the vehicle is
started, the BLIS automatically
illuminates both indicators for
several seconds indicating the
system is operating. The first time
you place the transmission in D (Drive) after starting the engine and
drive forward at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) the BLIS system
becomes active. Afterwards, the BLIS remains active for all speeds
including zero mph. BLIS is also active if the transmission is placed in N
(Neutral). If the transmission is shifted out of D (Drive) or N (Neutral)
the system will enter the CTA mode (see CTA operation below). Once
shifted back in to D (Drive) the BLIS mode will activate once driven
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
313
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
The BLIS will trigger the alert for vehicles that enter your blind zone
from the rear or merge in to the blind zone from the side. Vehicles that
you pass, or a vehicle that enters the blind zone from the front, will
trigger the alert only after the vehicle is present in the blind zone for
three seconds. Note: For vehicles that pass through the blind zone
quickly, typically less then two seconds, the BLIS will not illuminate the
alert.
The BLIS consists of two radar
sensors each located at rearward of
the rear wheel hidden behind the
bumper fascia. Do not place any
type of bumper sticker in this area.
Note: The BLIS typically will not
detect parked vehicles, humans,
animals, or infrastructure (fences,
guard rails, trees, etc.). The BLIS
does not function when the transmission is in R (Reverse) or P (Park).
The BLIS does not provide any additional warning when your turn
signal is activated.
BLIS detection limitations: Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the
blind spot zones may not be detected. Below is a list of circumstances
that may cause non-detection:
• Debris build up on the rear quarter panel fascias
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates
• Severe weather conditions
• When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone.
BLIS False Alerts
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances
when the BLIS will alert with no object present in the blind zone. This
is known as a false alert. Some level of false alerts are normal.
Circumstances that may cause a false alert are guardrails, freeway
concrete walls, cyclone fencing, sharp turns around a pole or building, or
coming to a stop with a vehicle directly behind but very close. False
alerts are temporary and self correct.
314
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Cross traffic alert (CTA) system operation
The CTA system warns the driver of approaching vehicles when R
(Reverse) is selected and the vehicle is backing out of a front-in parking
spot. It sounds a series of tones and flashes the BLIS indicator found on
the exterior mirror on the side of the approaching vehicle. Additionally,
the message center will display either, VEHICLE COMING FROM RIGHT
or VEHICLE COMING FROM LEFT to warn the driver from which
direction vehicles are approaching.
The system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or
objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver
in detecting vehicles in the blind zones. The system will not detect
infrastructure, pedestrians, or bicyclists.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, NEVER use the CTA
system as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors
and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space.
CTA is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist.
The CTA system detects vehicles approaching up to 45 feet (14 meters)
away (approximately the width of five parking spaces). Coverage
decreases when vehicles and objects in close proximity block the CTA
sensors (refer to figure for approximate zone coverage areas [sensor
obstructed for vehicle on left]). Backing slowly from the parking spot
in these situations helps to increase the sensor coverage and
effectiveness.
315
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
CTA coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles (refer to
figure for approximate zone coverage areas [sensor obstructed for
vehicle on left]).
CTA detection limitations: Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the
blind spot zones may not be detected. Below is a list of circumstances
that may cause non-detection:
• Debris build up on the rear quarter panel fascias
• The rear quarter panel radar beams are obstructed or partially
obstructed by an adjacently parked vehicle or object.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h)
• Severe weather conditions
• Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph (5 km/h)
• Backing out of an angled parking spot
CTA False Alerts
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances
when the BLIS will alert with no object present when backing up. This
is known as a false alert. Some level of false alerts are normal.
Circumstances that may cause a false alert when backing up are backing
out of a garage, backing in to a parking space, and objects very close to
the sensor. False alerts are temporary and self correct.
316
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
CTA and Reverse Sensing System (RSS) interaction
CTA works along with the Reverse Sensing System (RSS) (if equipped).
Become familiar with the warning tones of both systems.
BLIS and/or CTA on/off and disable operation
The BLIS and/or the CTA can be turned off via the message center. If
either the BLIS and/or the CTA is turned off, the systems will
automatically turn back on at the next ignition key cycle. When either
the BLIS and/or the CTA is turned off, the message center displays
BLIND SPOT SYS OFF and/or CTA SYSTEM OFF. When the BLIS
and/or the CTA system is off, the driver will not receive alerts. Refer to
Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey™ in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
The BLIS and/or the CTA can be disabled permanently even after an
ignition key cycle. This must be done by your authorized dealer. Note:
Once either of the systems are disabled, enabling must also be performed
at the dealership. When disabled, the message center will display BLIND
SPOT DISABLED and/or CTA DISABLED.
BLIS and/or CTA fault operation
If the BLIS and/or CTA senses a fault on either the left or right sensor,
the BLIS alert indicator will go on and remain on and the message
center will display BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC
SYSTEM FAULT. For faults that may cause the associated left or right
alert indicator not to illuminate, only the message center faults will
occur.
Blocked sensor
An extreme build-up of materials on
the quarter panel fascias such as
mud or snow can cause degraded
performance of the BLIS. Also,
heavy rain can cause the same
effect. The BLIS can detect this
degraded performance and issue a
blocked warning to the driver via
the message center. If a condition is determined by the system, the
message center displays BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE or CROSS
TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE warning and the appropriate left and/or right
exterior mirror alert indicator will illuminate. The message center
warning may be cleared by the driver but the exterior mirror alert
indicator will remain illuminated.
317
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
WARNING: Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked
condition and alerting the driver, the number of missed objects
will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS as a
replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS is not a replacement for
careful driving and only an assist.
Once the blockage is removed, the system will require some driving time
and detection of at least two vehicle objects prior to resetting or the
driver can cycle the ignition key. If, however, blockage is still present
after the key cycle, the system will sense again that it is blocked after
driving in traffic.
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message
being displayed:
The surface of the radar is dirty or Clean the fascia area in front of
obstructed in some way
the radar, either side, or remove
obstruction.
The surface of the radar is not
dirty or obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for a few
minutes to allow the radar to
detect that it is no longer blocked.
Note: The vehicle must be in D
(Drive) and a few vehicles must
pass so that the BLIS can clear a
blocked state.
Heavy rainfall or heavy snowfall is No action required by the driver.
interfering with the radar signals
The system will automatically reset
to an unblocked state once the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops. Do not use BLIS and/or
CTA in heavy rainfall or heavy
snowfall.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage
warning and not be blocked. This is rare and known as a false blockage
warning. A false blocked condition will either self clear or clear after a
key cycle.
318
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Trailer tow false alerts
When towing a trailer, the sensors may detect the trailer thus causing a
false alert. It may be desirable to turn the BLIS off if the false alerts
become annoying.
Day and night brightness
The BLIS and/or CTA alert will automatically dim when the headlamp
switch is in PARK, ON, or AUTO ON and night time darkness has been
detected by the sun sensor.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
system. The AWD system is an active system, meaning it not only
responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the
ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels
before slip occurs. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no
input from the operator.
All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no
maintenance.
Note: When an AWD system fault is present, the warning CHECK AWD
will display in the message center. The AWD system is not functioning
correctly and defaulted to front wheel drive. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer
If your vehicle is equipped with AWD, a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided should never be used. If the spare tire is
installed, the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front
wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components. This condition
may be indicated by an AWD OFF message in the message center (see
Message center section in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more
information). If there is an AWD OFF message in the message center
from using the spare tire, this indicator should turn off after reinstalling
the repaired or replaced normal road tire and driving a short distance. It
is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles
could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front
wheel drive or damage the AWD system.
Note: The AWD OFF message may also be displayed in the message
center if the AWD system has overheated and defaulted to front wheel
drive. This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme
conditions with excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To resume
normal AWD function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
319
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
location and allow it to idle. The AWD OFF message will turn off when
the system cools and normal AWD function returns.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD
feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which
driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise
similar to normal on-road driving conditions. Operating your vehicle
under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive
stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Driving on slippery surfaces with AWD vehicles
AWD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds off-highway under high outside
temperatures, use a low gear when possible. Lower gear operation will
maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
320
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control™, it may be beneficial
to disengage the Traction Control™ system while attempting to rock the
vehicle.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle (i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
321
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
AWD Systems (if equipped)
AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside
temperatures, use a low gear when possible. Lower gear operation will
maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to
protect overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the wheel rims (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the engine, transmission, AWD system components or axles are
submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if
necessary.
322
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Driving through deep water may damage the engine or
transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and
PTU (Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if
necessary.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, Do not try to turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
323
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have
to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do
not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since
your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS),
do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter
for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system.
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
324
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-highway usage.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
325
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24-hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford/Mercury/Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide
for information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
326
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
In Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may
purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1-877-294-2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside
Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673.
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1-800-665-2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford, Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call
1-800-241-3673. Customers will be asked to submit their original
receipts.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1-800-665-2006.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher control is located
on the instrument panel by the
radio. The hazard flashers will
operate when the ignition is in any
position or if the key is not in the
ignition.
Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
327
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, you may
restart your vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the off position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the on position.
In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to
restart and may take one additional attempt.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected
by an authorized dealer after any collision.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
15
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
328
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
—
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A
3A
4A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5A
—
—
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Brown
Red
Brown
Red
—
—
—
Yellow
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
—
—
—
—
Blue
—
Pink
Green
Red
Yellow
Brown
Black
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
Blue
Yellow
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Black
329
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A
Protected Circuits
1
2
3
Right rear smart window
Refrigerator
Driver seat switch, 2nd row
lumbar switches
15A
15A
4
5
30A
10A
Right front smart window
Brake transmission shift interlock,
3rd row power fold module
Turn signals
6
7
20A
10A
Low beam headlamps (left)
330
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
Protected Circuits
8
9
10
11
12
13
Low beam headlamps (right)
Interior lights, Cargo lamps
Backlighting, Puddle lamps
All wheel drive (AWD)
Intelligent access (IA)
IA receiver, Exterior mirror
switch, Steering column position
switch, Driver seat module, Driver
door module, Keypad
15A
15A
10A
7.5A
5A
14
15
16
10A
10A
15A
Power liftgate module, SYNC,
Rear entertainment
Climate control, Electronic finish
panel
Navigation display, ALM, Auxiliary
climate control
17
18
19
20
20A
20A
25A
15A
Not used (spare)
Amplifier
Amplifier
Data link connector (OBD-2), 2nd
row power fold seat motors
Fog lamps
Park lamps, License plate lamps,
Illuminated liftgate applique
High beam headlamps, Auto high
beam relay, Fog lamp deactivation
relay
21
22
15A
15A
23
15A
24
25
20A
10A
Horn
Demand lamps/Interior lamps, 2nd
row power fold seats, Powertrain
control module (GTDI) wake-up,
3rd row seat relay
331
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
26
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A
Protected Circuits
Instrument panel cluster, Heads
up display
27
28
29
30
31
20A
5A
5A
5A
10A
Ignition Switch, IA
Radio mute
Instrument panel cluster
Transmission shifter
Steering angle sensor, Heads up
display
32
33
34
35
36
37
10A
10A
5A
10A
5A
Restraint control module
Adaptive lighting module
Front body run/start feeds
Body module run/start feeds
Not used (spare)
Powertrain control module
run/start, Fuel relay
Trailer tow park lamps
Audio control module
Cigarette lighter
10A
38
39
40
41
42
43
20A
20A
20A
15A
10A
10A
Delayed accessory feeds
Not used (spare)
Auxiliary blower, Rear wiper, Rain
sensor
44
45
10A
5A
Trailer tow backup lamps
Front wiper, Front blower, Wiper
relay
46
7.5A
Occupant classification sensor
(OCS), Passenger airbag
deactivation indicator (PADI),
Front control interface module
Not used
47
48
30A Circuit
Breaker
Full ISO relay Delayed accessory relay
332
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
—
Protected Circuits
1
2
3
4
Not used
Not used
Trailer tow brake controller
Wiper relay (front and rear)
—
30A*
40A*
333
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A*
Protected Circuits
Passenger power seat
5
6
7
8
9
30A*
30A*
30A*
40A*
110V AC inverter
Rear climate control seat module
Front climate control seat module
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
pump
10
11
30A*
30A*
Starter
Powertrain control module (PCM)
vehicle power
12
13
20A*
20A**
ABS valve
Right high intensity discharge
(HID) headlamp
14
15
10A**
15A**
Brake on/off (BOO) switch,
Adaptive cruise relay
Automatic high beams, Adaptive
cruise control
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
20A**
10A**
30A*
20A*
40A*
20A*
40A*
Left HID headlamp
Alternator sensor
3rd row power seats
Front console power point
Rear defroster, Heated mirrors
Rear console power point
Trailer tow battery charge, Trailer
tow stop/turn lamps fuse 45
power
23
10A**
PCM keep alive power, Canister
vent, Relay coil
24
25
26
27
10A**
20A**
15A**
15A**
A/C clutch
Rear power point
Backup lamps
Fuel relay (Fuel pump driver
module, Fuel pump)
334
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
80A*
Protected Circuits
28
29
Cooling fan
30A*
Left rear smart window,
Panoramic roof module, Power
sunshade module
30
31
32
30A*
40A*
30A*
Left front smart window
Auxiliary blower motor
Driver seat motor, Memory motor
power
33
34
35
36
30A*
30A*
40A*
25A**
Run/start relay
Power liftgate
Front A/C blower
Rear wiper module (secondary
fuse)
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
15A**
10A**
Diode
Washer pump
Trailer tow backup lamps
Fuel diode
One touch integrated start diode
Trailer tow park lamp
Trailer tow stop/turn lamp (left)
Trailer tow stop/turn lamp (right)
Backup lamps relay
Trailer tow stop/turn lamps
(secondary fuse)
Diode
G8VA relay
G8VA relay
G8VA relay
G8VA relay
20A**
46
15A**
PCM vehicle power 2, Vehicle
power 3
47
48
20A**
15A**
PCM vehicle power 1
PCM vehicle power 4 (coil on
plugs)
49
50
51
52
10A**
Heated mirrors (secondary fuse)
HC micro relay Blower motor
HC micro relay Fog lamp deactivation
HC micro relay Starter
335
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
53
54
55
56
HC micro relay Adaptive cruise control
HC micro relay 3rd row power seats
HC micro relay Wipers (front)
HC micro relay Rear window defroster, Heated
mirrors
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
—
—
Not used
Not used
HC micro relay Auxiliary blower motor
HC micro relay Trailer tow battery charge
G8VA relay
G8VA relay
HC micro relay Run/start
HC micro relay PCM
G8VA relay
G8VA relay
Refrigerator
Automatic high beams
A/C clutch
Fuel pump
* Cartridge Fuses ** Mini Fuses
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare
tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for
damage.
336
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire
Pressure Monitoring System and should only be used if it is
supplied with your vehicle as part of the original temporary mobility
kit.
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
337
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
338
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, set the
parking brake and activate hazard
flashers.
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park)
and turn engine off.
Removing the spare tire and jack
If the 3rd row seat is stowed in the floor, you will need to unstow it to
access the spare tire and jack. Refer to Unstowing the third row seat in
the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for this procedure.
1. Remove the carpeted floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle,
remove the wing nut that secures
the spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
2. Lift and remove the spare tire
from the trunk.
3. Remove the second wing nut that
secures the jack retention bracket
by turning it counterclockwise,
remove the jack kit from the
vehicle.
4. Remove the jack, L-shaped bolt,
and the wrench from the felt bag.
Fold down the wrench socket to use
to loosen the lug nuts and to operate the jack.
Tire change procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park).
339
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission in P (Park), set
the parking brake and block (in both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire
being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Remove wheel cover (if
equipped) with the lug wrench tip
and loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
340
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
3. Put the jack in the jack notch
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall the
lug nuts until the wheel is snug
against the hub. Do not fully tighten
the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
6. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
7. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the order shown.
Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
1
3
4
8. Install the wheel cover (if
equipped).
5
2
Stowing the tire and jack
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the
lug wrench socket into the handle
and place the jack and wrench into
the felt bag as shown. Place the
extension bolt or L-shaped bolt into
the external pocket of the felt bag.
Take care to position the jack as
shown to ensure that the locating
holes in the jack base can be placed
on the locating tabs of the jack
mounting bracket in the spare tire
tub.
341
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
2. Securely close the wrench compartment and the jack bag using the
Velcro strips.
3. Place the jack kit on the angled bracket in the spare tire tub, using
the locating tabs to position the jack correctly.
4. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet
of the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With
the jack in place, place the looped
end of the retention bracket over
the threaded stud in the trunk floor
and secure it with the plastic wing
nut.
If you are stowing the flat tire,
remove the L-shaped bolt from from
the external pocket of the felt bag.
With the 3rd row seat in the raised
position, stand the flat tire in the
rear of the vehicle with the tire’s
valve stem facing the rear of the
vehicle. Fasten the flat tire to the
vehicle by inserting the L-shaped
bolt through one of the lug bolt
holes in the wheel and turning
clockwise into the threaded hole in the vehicle until the tire is secured.
If you are stowing the temporary spare tire, place the tire over the
jack and secure it with the large wing nut.
342
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary mobility kit (located
under the driver’s seat). To remove
the temporary mobility kit, move the
driver’s seat fully forward and undo
the Velcro strap that attaches it to
the rear of the seat frame.
To replace the temporary mobility kit, open the Velcro strap on the bag
and slide the bag back under the driver’s seat. Wrap the strap over the
rear frame bar, loop it through the buckle and secure the bag to the seat
frame.
The temporary mobility kit consists of an air compressor to reinflate the
tire and a sealing compound in a canister that will effectively seal most
punctures caused by nails or similar objects. This kit will provide a
temporary seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 120 miles
(200 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING: When towing a trailer, use the temporary mobility
kit and not the mini spare tire if necessary. The mini spare tire is
not intended for the higher towing load limits of this vehicle. When
towing heavy loads with the mini spare tire, vehicle handling may be
diminished, which could lead to loss of control, and serious personal
injury.
Note: The temporary mobility kit sealant compound in the canister is to
be used for one tire only. See your authorized dealer for additional
replacement sealant canisters.
343
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
1. Air compressor (inside)
2. Diverter knob
3. On/Off switch
4. Air pressure gauge
5. Sealant bottle/canister
6. Sealant filling clear tube
1
2
3
4
12
5
7. Sealant tube — tire valve
connector
6
8. Yellow cap tool
9. Air compressor hose
10. Air hose — tire valve connector
11. Accessory power plug
12. Casing/housing
11
7
8
10
9
General information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
1
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than ⁄4 inch (6.4 mm) or
damage to the tire’s sidewall. The tire may not completely seal.
Note: Do not use the temporary mobility kit if a tire has become
severely damaged by driving the vehicle with a tire that has insufficient
air pressure. Only punctured areas located within the tire tread can be
sealed with the temporary mobility kit.
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire performance. For this
reason:
• Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not drive further than 120 miles (200 km). Drive only to the
closest Ford Motor Company authorized dealer or tire repair shop to
have your tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure in the affected tire; if the
tire is losing pressure, have the vehicle towed.
344
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• Read the information in the Tips for use of the temporary mobility
kit section to ensure safe operation of the temporary mobility kit and
your vehicle.
Tips for use of the temporary mobility kit
Read the following list of tips to ensure safe operation of the temporary
mobility kit:
• Before operating the temporary mobility kit, make sure your vehicle is
safely off the road and away from moving traffic. Turn on the hazard
lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure the vehicle doesn’t move
unexpectedly.
• Do not remove any foreign objects, such as nails or screws, from the
tire.
• When using the temporary mobility kit, leave the engine running
(only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated area) so
the compressor doesn’t drain the vehicle’s battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to operate continuously for more than
15 minutes; this will help prevent the compressor from overheating.
• Never leave the temporary mobility kit unattended when it is
operating.
• Sealant compound contains latex. Make sure that you use the
non-latex gloves provided to avoid an allergic reaction.
• Keep the temporary mobility kit away from children.
• Only use the temporary mobility kit when the ambient temperature is
between -22°F (–30°C) and 158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before the use by date. The use by
date is on the lower right hand corner of the label located on the
sealant canister (bottle). Check the use by date regularly and
replace the canister after four years.
• Do not store the temporary mobility kit unsecured inside the
passenger compartment of the vehicle as it may cause injury during a
sudden stop or collision. Always store the kit in its original location.
• After sealant use, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
• When inflating a tire or other objects, use the black air hose only. Do
not use the transparent hose which is designed for sealant application
only.
345
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
• Operating the temporary mobility kit could cause an electrical
disturbance in radio and DVD player operation.
What to do when a tire is punctured
A tire puncture within the tire’s tread area can be repaired in two stages
with the temporary mobility kit:
• In the first stage, the tire will be reinflated with a sealing compound
and air. After the tire has been reinflated, you will need to drive the
vehicle a short distance (approximately 4 miles [6 km]) to distribute
the sealant in the tire.
• In the second stage, you will need to check the tire pressure and
adjust, if necessary, to the vehicle’s tire inflation pressure.
First stage: Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air
Preparation
Park the vehicle in a safe, level and secure area, away from moving
traffic. Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking brake and turn the
engine off. Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. To avoid any allergic reactions, use the
non-latex gloves located in the accessory box on the underside of the
temporary mobility kit housing.
Do not remove any foreign object that has pierced the tire. If a puncture
is located in the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unwrap the clear tube from the compressor housing.
3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the metal connector of the tube to
the tire valve, turning clockwise. Make sure the connection is tightly
fastened.
346
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
4. Plug the power cable into the 12V
power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on the canister and place it on the
top of the instrument panel or the center of the dash.
6. Start the engine (only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a
well-ventilated area).
7. Turn dial (1) counterclockwise to
the sealant position. Turn on the kit
by pressing the on/off button (2).
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure
listed on the tire label located on
the driver’s door or the door jam
area.
Note: When the sealing compound is first added into the tire, the
air pressure gauge reading on the compressor unit may indicate a
higher value; this is normal and should be no reason for concern.
The pressure will drop after about 30 seconds of operation. The
347
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
tire pressure has to be checked with the compressor in the OFF
position to get the correct tire pressure reading.
WARNING: Do not stand directly over the temporary mobility
kit while inflating the tire. If you notice any unusual bulges or
deformations in the tire’s sidewall during inflation, stop and call
roadside assistance.
WARNING: If the tire doesn’t inflate to the recommended tire
pressure within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside assistance.
9. When the recommended tire pressure is reached, turn off the kit by
pressing the on/off button; disconnect the kit from the tire valve and the
power point. Re-install the valve cap on the tire valve, place the tube cap
on the metal connector, and return the kit to the stowage area.
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the vehicle 4 miles (6 km)
to distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
Note: If you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise while driving, reduce your speed until you can safely pull off to
the side of the road to call for roadside assistance. Do not proceed
to the second stage of this operation.
11. After 4 miles (6 km), stop and check the tire pressure. See Second
stage: Checking tire pressure.
Second stage: Checking tire pressure
Check the air pressure of your tires as follows:
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unhook the black hose from the side of the compressor and fasten
firmly on the valve stem by turning clockwise.
WARNING: If you are proceeding from the First stage:
Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air section
and have injected sealant in the tire and the pressure is below 20 psi
(1.4 bar), stop and call roadside assistance. If tire pressure is
above 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step.
3. Turn the dial clockwise to the air position. Turn on the kit by pressing
the on/off button.
348
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
4. Adjust the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure
from the tire label located on the
driver’s door or door jam area.
Note: The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in the
OFF position to get the correct tire
pressure reading.
5. Turn the compressor off by
pressing the on/off button.
6. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve cap on the tire and return the
kit to the stowage area.
WARNING: The power plug may get hot after use and should
be handled carefully while unplugging.
What to do after the tire has been sealed
After using the temporary mobility kit to seal your tire, you will need to
replace the sealant canister and clear tube (hose). Sealing compound
and spare parts can be obtained and replaced at an authorized Ford
Motor Company dealership or tire dealer. Empty sealant bottles may be
disposed of at home; however, liquid residue from the sealing compound
should be disposed by your local Ford Motor Company dealership or tire
dealer, or in accordance with local waste disposal regulations.
Note: After the sealing compound has been used, the maximum vehicle
speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance is
120 miles (200 km). The sealed tire should be inspected immediately.
Note: After sealant use, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel
must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
You can check the tire pressure any time within the 120 miles (200 km)
by performing the procedure from Second stage: Checking tire
pressure listed previously.
349
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Removal of the Sealant Canister from the Temporary Mobility Kit
1. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
2. Locate the yellow cap at the end
of the clear tube.
3. Using the yellow cap tool, press
the tab located on the temporary
mobility kit compressor housing
while pulling up on the sealant
canister.
350
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Installation of the Sealant Canister to the Temporary Mobility
Kit
1. Align the sealant canister with
the temporary mobility kit housing.
2. Once aligned, seat the sealant
canister by lightly pushing down
until you hear an audible click.
3. Wrap the clear tube around the
compressor housing.
351
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Note: If you experience any difficulties with the removal or installation
of the sealant canister, consult your Ford Motor Company authorized
dealer for assistance.
Be sure to check the sealant
compound’s “use by” date regularly.
The “use by” date is on the lower
right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister
(bottle). The sealant canister should be replaced after four years.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft.
100
N•m
1/2-20 UNF
135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
352
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable
fuel container, see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable
fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel. Do not insert the
nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into
the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system as it can be damaged. You must
use the included funnel in such circumstances.
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, all of which could result in
serious personal injury.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
353
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
354
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
355
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding
points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
356
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
357
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
358
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On FWD vehicles, if your vehicle is to be towed from the front, ensure
proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the
ground. The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this
fashion.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transmission.
On AWD vehicles, it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground to
prevent damage to the automatic transmission, AWD system or vehicle.
359
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Emergencies
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). Refer to Brake-shift interlock
in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the
gear shift lever into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
360
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealer. While any authorized dealer handling
your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you
return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized
by Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
361
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Mailing address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
362
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
363
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section,
you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your
claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case
in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing.
You are not bound by the decision, but should you choose to accept the
BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford must abide by the accepted decision as
well. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually
decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
364
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
365
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by writing to:
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
Service Publications CHQ202
The Canadian Road
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6J 5E4
366
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510.
367
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42) which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
368
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Motorcraft Premium
Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer,
or an equivalent quality product.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A),
which is available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your authorized dealer.
369
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
3.7L V6 Duratec engine
370
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
371
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
Cleaner (ZC-23) in the U.S., or Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid [CXC-37-(A, B, D, or F)] in Canada, available from your
authorized dealer.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A),
available from your authorized dealer. This washer fluid contains
special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear
worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton
cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
372
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side-airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a collision.
373
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available cleaning product designed for automotive leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality
products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These
quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish (ZC-8-A)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
374
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax (ZC-53-A)
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
375
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty
Guide/Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and
services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
376
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located at the bottom
of the instrument panel near the
steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch using the
handle that is located under the
front passenger side of the hood.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
377
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Brake fluid reservoir
3. Battery
4. Power distribution box
5. Air filter assembly
6. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick (out of view)
7. Engine oil dipstick
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
378
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Engine shield
Some vehicles may be equipped
with an aero-shield under the
engine. This shield needs to be
removed for service, including oil
and filter changes. It is secured with
four screws.
3.7L V6 Duratec engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Battery
7. Automatic transmission fluid
dipstick
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Engine oil filler cap
10. Windshield washer fluid
reservoir
5. Power distribution box
6. Air filter assembly
379
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. Do not use any
special washer fluid such as
windshield water repellent type fluid
or bug wash. They may cause
squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
380
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm
away from the glass.
2. Squeeze the locking tabs to
release the blade from the arm and
pull the blade away from the arm to
remove it.
3. Attach the new blade to the arm and snap it into place.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
Changing rear window wiper blade
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.
381
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Grab the wiper arm with one
hand close to the arm/blade joint
and pull it as far away from the
glass as possible. Do not use
excessive force because it can break
the wiper arm at the heel. Hold it
there until the next step.
2. Grab the primary structure of the
blade with the other hand close to
the arm/blade joint.
3. Grip tightly and press on the arm/blade joint from beneath and
separate the blade from the arm.
4. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
If you find this procedure too
difficult, please see your dealer.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
382
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is within this
range, the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below this
mark, engine oil must be added
to raise the level within the
normal operating range.
• If required, add engine oil to the
engine. Refer to Adding engine
oil in this chapter.
383
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Do not overfill the engine
with oil. Oil levels above this
mark may cause engine
damage. If the engine is
overfilled, some oil must be
removed from the engine by an
authorized dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range, add
only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the
engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
384
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the
current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this chapter for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free
battery which normally does not
require additional water during its
life of service.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
385
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
386
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
387
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water,
which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester. The level of
coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add
coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Proper function of calibrated gauges.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
388
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. If coolant is
filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is
not cool, the system will remain underfilled.
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle.
Make sure the correct coolant is used. DO NOT MIX recycled coolant
and new (unused) coolant together in the vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system. The use of an
improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components
and may void the warranty. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
389
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34°F/–36°C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
390
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34°F [–36°C]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may cause engine damage.
391
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
Engine fluid temperature management (EcoBoost engine only)
Your vehicle has been designed to pull a trailer, but because of the added
load, the vehicle’s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures
during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep
grade while pulling a trailer in hot ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge
needle move toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER
TEMP message may appear on the message center.
You may notice a reduction in the vehicle’s speed caused by reduced
engine power. Your vehicle has been designed to enter this mode if
certain high temperature/high load conditions take place in order to
manage the engine’s fluid temperatures. The amount of speed reduction
will depend on the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient temperature,
and other factors. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road.
The vehicle can continue to be driven while this message is active.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of collision and injury, be
prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may
not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures
reduce.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect overheating of the engine. When the engine coolant
temperature decreases to a more normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If you notice any of the following:
• the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red (hot)
area
• the coolant temperature warning light illuminates
• the service engine soon indicator illuminates
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and place the vehicle in P
(Park).
392
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the H range. After several minutes, if this does not
happen, follow the remaining steps.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant
level.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
4. If the coolant level is normal, you may restart your engine and
continue on.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, restart the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer. See Adding engine coolant in this
chapter for more information.
Refer to fail-safe cooling for additional information.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The coolant temperature warning light
will illuminate.
• The service engine soon
indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
393
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
394
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
395
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Refueling
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system
Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel filler
system. This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the
fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system. The Easy Fuel™ system is
self-sealing and protected against dust, dirt, water and snow/ice.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system. Pump fuel
as normal.
396
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing the
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank
and not spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below
and in front of the fuel filler door.
If the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message
comes on, the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed. The inlet may
have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off the road, turn off the engine,
open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel (see
Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location) provided
with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the
inlet to close properly. If this action corrects the problem, the check fuel
fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet
lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine
off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive with the check
fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause
the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel™ “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 10% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded
fuel or any other fuel. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and
could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
397
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Octane recommendations
3.7L V6 engine
Your vehicle will run normally on 87 octane regular fuel. Premium fuel
will provide improved performance.
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
Your vehicle is designed to run on regular fuel with an octane rating of
87 or higher. For best overall performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using
premium fuel will be most noticeable in hot weather or in severe duty
applications such as towing a trailer.
Some stations offer fuels posted as
ЉRegularЉ with an octane rating
below 87, particularly in high
87
altitude areas. Fuels with octane
(R+M)/2 METHOD
levels below 87 are not
recommended for either engine. Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily while you are
using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized
dealer to prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. If the problems
persist, see your authorized dealer.
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
398
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon
indicator may come on. For more
information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning
lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Refilling with a portable fuel container
With the Easy Fuel™ “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel™ system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy
Fuel™ system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
399
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
1. After lifting the carpeted floor
panel, locate the white plastic
funnel. It is attached to the rear,
lower edge of the spare tire
compartment.
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the
Easy Fuel™ system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with
the Easy Fuel™ system and can damage it. The included funnel has
been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000
km).
400
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
401
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
402
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA fuel economy estimates
Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the
Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates. Contact
your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your
vehicle. The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the
fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. Your fuel economy may
vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
403
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
404
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for
complete emission warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
engine soon
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel™
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon
indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon
indicator on can
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
405
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board
diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon
indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
406
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
POWER STEERING FLUID (EXCEPT ECOBOOST ENGINE)
Refer to scheduled maintenance information.
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper
fluid type.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the MIN and
MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
407
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 miles [30 km]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached to
allow the fluid to cool before checking. Depending on vehicle use,
cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow a minimum of 10 seconds for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. (For vehicles with the
EcoBoost engine, move the air filter assembly aside to access the
transmission dipstick).
WARNING: The dipstick cap and surrounding components may
be hot; gloves are recommended.
WARNING: Use gloves when moving the air filter assembly;
components will be hot.
408
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
For vehicles equipped with the EcoBoost engine, do the following:
A. Shut the engine off.
B. Clean the area around the clamp
that connects the air filter assembly
to the rubber hose (1).
1
4
3
2
C. Remove the bolt cover (if
equipped).
D. Remove two bolts that attach the
air filter assembly to the front of the
vehicle (2).
E. Loosen the clamp holding the air
filter assembly to the rubber hose
(1).
F. Remove the harness retaining clip
by pulling up (3). Do not disconnect
the mass airflow sensor (4).
G. Without disconnecting the mass
airflow sensor (4), pull the air filter
assembly up to disconnect the air
filter assembly from the seated grommets located underneath the air
filter assembly.
409
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
H. Rotate the air filter assembly 90
degrees counterclockwise and
reinstall into the rubber hose.
I. Tighten the clamp (1).
J. The transmission fluid level
indicator can now be accessed.
WARNING: Do not run engine with the air filter disconnected.
Start the engine and continue with Step 6.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube by
turning it to the locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated areas for normal operating temperature.
Low fluid level
If the fluid level is below the MIN
MIN
MAX
range of the dipstick, add fluid to
reach the hash mark level. Note: If
the fluid level is below the MIN
level, do not drive the vehicle. An underfill condition may cause shift
and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 180°F-200°F (82°C-93°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
The transmission fluid level should
be targeted within the cross-hatch
area if at normal operating
temperature 180°F-200°F
(82°C-93°C).
410
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
High fluid level
If the fluid level is above the MAX
range of the dipstick, remove fluid
to reach the hashmark level. Note:
Fluid level above the MAX level may
MIN
MAX
cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. If your
vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city
traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached. Depending
on vehicle use, cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this
chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint
(250 ml) increments through the
filler tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
MIN
MAX
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
For vehicles equipped with the EcoBoost engine, reinstall the air
filter assembly.
After the fluid level has been checked and adjusted as necessary, do the
following:
A. Shut the engine off.
B. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter assembly to the rubber hose.
C. Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees clockwise without
disconnecting the mass air flow sensor.
411
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
D. Seat the air filter assembly back into the grommets by pushing down
on the air filter assembly.
E. Tighten the clamp.
F. Install & tighten two bolts that attach air filter assembly to the front of
the vehicle.
G. Reinstall the harness retaining clip into the front of the air filter
assembly.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
For Ecoboost equipped vehicles, when servicing the air cleaner, it is
important that no foreign material enter the air induction system. The
engine and turbocharger are susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
412
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Changing the air filter element
3.7L V6 engine
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
4. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
413
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
6. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
sure that the air cleaner cover tabs
are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
3.7L V6 engine
3.5L V6 EcoBoost
engine
Engine air filter
element
FA-1884
FA-1884
Battery
Oil filter
Spark Plugs
BXT-65-750
FL-500-S
SP-4111
BXT-65-750
FL-500-S
SP-5121
1For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
414
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
415
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
416
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
417
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Cubic inches
3.7L V6 engine
226
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
214
See Octane
See Octane
Fuel
recommendations
earlier in this chapter.
1–4–2–5–3–6
recommendations earlier
in this chapter.
1–4–2–5–3–6
Firing order
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42 mm)
Coil on plug
0.033–0.037 inch (.838–
.939 mm)
Spark plug gap
Ignition system
Compression
ratio
Coil on plug
10.3:1
10.0:1
Engine drivebelt routing
3.7L V6 engine
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine (except
vehicles with electric power assisted steering).
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine.
418
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.
419
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
420
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description
Code
6F50 6–Speed Automatic Transmission
6F55 6–Speed Automatic Transmission (with
EcoBoost)
J
G
421
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
GENUINE LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer. These
quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln’s
rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Lincoln
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are
available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online
store at: www.lincolnaccessories.com.
Exterior style
Deflectors
Chrome wheels
Interior style
Floor mats
Lifestyle
Cargo organization and management
Conversation mirror
Peace of mind
Remote start
Locking fuel plug for capless fuel systems
Cargo area protector
Wheel locks
422
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to
the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
423
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
More than 30 million Ford, Lincoln, and Mercury owners have discovered
the powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask you dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford, Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in
the U.S. and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
424
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ford Extended Service Plan
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades
• Spark plugs (except
California)
• Clutch disc
• Brake pads and linings
• Shock absorbers
• Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford, Lincoln, or Mercury dealership today so they
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving
lifestyle and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
425
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ford Extended Service Plan
426
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
Automatic transaxle
Automatic transmission
B
C
427
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Cleaning your vehicle
D
Defrost
Dipstick
Console
Doors
Controls
Coolant
428
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
E
Emergencies, roadside
G
F
H
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
429
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Heating
L
Lamps
I
Instrument panel
Locks
J
M
K
Keyless entry system
430
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
N
R
O
P
431
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
S
Steering wheel
T
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)
432
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
V
W
Transaxle
Windows
U
433
2010 MKT (mkt)
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
